Peugeot 208 Vehicle Handbook
peugeot leasing, peugeot open europe, european leasing, peugeot specifications, vehicle manual, car guide, leasing in europe, long term car hire, peugeot 208
Peugeot Open Europe
Peugeot-208-Manual Handbook
Flipbook
Start MyPEUGEOT
The handbook.
The on-line handbook: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/
Start
To download to your smartphone.
Start MyPEUGEOT
Mirror Screen
Start
To display in the touch screen of your vehicle.
Find all of the information from the handbook for your vehicle on the internet.
The latest information included is identified by this symbol:
From the home page presenting the range, choose a language, click on the body style and then the edition, by reference to the date of first registration of the vehicle.
The Start MyPEUGEOT application is available for your vehicle and allows familiarisation with your new PEUGEOT.
Summary of the main systems and their settings.
Access to certain driving assistance systems.
Library of warning and indicator lamps.
Focus on audio & telematic functions.
App Store for smartphones that support CarPlay® and Google Play for smartphones that support MirrorLinkTM.
The synchronisation of a personal smartphone allows users to display applications from the smartphone adapted for the CarPlay® and MirrorLinkTM technology.
The Start MyPEUGEOT inter-activity becomes available in landscape format in the touch screen.
Welcome
Thank you for choosing a 208. This handbook has been designed to help you make the most of your vehicle in all circumstances.
Contents
Overview
Ease of use and comfort
Safety
Exterior view
4 PEUGEOT i-Cockpit
48 Hazard warning lamps
90
Interior view
5 Front seats
49 Road holding
90
Instruments and controls
6 One-piece rear seats
53 Seat belts
93
Middle console
8 Ventilation
56 Airbags
96
Upper console
9 Heating
59 Carrying children
100
Lower console Underbonnet view
9 Air conditioning
61 Deactivating the passenger's
10 Dual-zone digital air conditioning
63
front airbag
102
Demisting - defrosting
66 ISOFIX child seats
109
Courtesy lamp
68 Child lock
114
Mood lighting
69
Sunroof blind
70
Interior fittings
71
Instruments
Ports and sockets - Connectivity
72
Boot fittings
73
Instrument panels
11 Rear parcel shelf
74
Library of indicator and warning lamps Engine coolant temperature Touch screen Trip computer Date and time Lighting dimmer
14 25 29 30 33 34
Mirrors
Eco-driving
Driving recommendations
Starting
Lighting and visibility
Switching off Parking brake
75 Manual gearbox
Lighting
77 Electronic gearbox
Automatic illumination of headlamps
79 Automatic gearbox
Daytime running lamps
83 Gear shift indicator
Access
Direction indicators Headlamp adjustment
84 Hill start assist 85 Stop & Start
Unlocking - Key
35 Cornering lighting
86 Speed limiter
Doors
35 Wipers
87 Cruise control
3-door
36
Locking - Key
37
Active City Brake Parking sensors
Alarm
41
Boot
43
Reversing camera Park Assist
Window controls
46
Under-inflation detection
Driving
115 117 118 120 121 122 123 126 129 130 131 134 136 141 144 146 147 151
2
Contents
Practical information
Fuel tank
154
Snow chains
158
Towing a trailer
159
Energy load
161
Accessories
162
Changing a wiper blade
164
Fitting roof bars
165
Bonnet
167
Checking levels
170
Checks
173
BlueHDi and AdBlue® additive
174
Straight cut matt paint
181
Technical data
General information
215
Petrol engines
216
Diesel engines
217
Dimensions (in mm)
218
Identification markings
220
Audio equipment and telematics
Emergency call
222
Assistance call
223
7-inch touch screen
225
Audio system / Bluetooth
295
Audio system
315
Key
Warning This symbol marks warnings which it is essential to observe for your own safety, for the safety of others or to avoid any risk of damaging your vehicle.
Information This symbol draws your attention to additional information for better use of your vehicle.
Protection of the environment This symbol accompanies advice relating to protection of the environment.
In the event of a breakdown
Triangle
182
Temporary puncture repair kit
183
Spare wheel
188
Changing a bulb
195
Fuses
202
12 V battery
208
Towing
212
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
214
Alphabetical index
Advice This symbol indicates a reminder of practical information.
3
Overview
Exterior view
Remote control key - opening / closing - anti-theft protection - guide-me-home lighting - starting - switching off - battery - unlocking the vehicle - locking the vehicle
35-39, 44
Lighting controls
77-83
LED lamps
83
Daytime running lamps
83
Headlamp beam adjustment
85
Cornering lighting
86
Changing bulbs
195-199
- front lamps
- foglamps
- direction indicator repeaters
Door mirrors
Doors - opening / closing - central locking - emergency control Courtesy lamp Alarm Electric windows
75-76
35-39, 40
68 41-42 46-47
4
Sunroof blind Roof bars Accessories Advice on care
70 165 162-163 181
Roadholding Snow chains Under-inflation Tyre pressures Spare wheel - tools - removing / refitting
90-92 158
151-153 186-187, 220
188-194
Wipers Changing a wiper blade Demisting - Defrosting
87-89 164
66-67
Boot - opening / closing - emergency release
Reversing camera
Temporary puncture repair kit
43
146 183-187
Park Assist Parking sensors Towbar Towing
147-150 144-145 159-161 212-213
Changing bulbs - rear lamps - 3rd brake lamp - number plate lamps - foglamp
199-201
Fuel tank, misfuel prevention 154-157
Running out of Diesel fuel
214
Interior view
Boot fittings - rear parcel shelf - hooks - boot lamp - lashing rings
73-74
Front seats Heated seats Front arm rest
Rear seats
53-55
Child seats
100-113
Child seats used with a 3-point
seat belt
106-108
ISOFIX child seats
109-112
Manual child lock
114
Electric child lock
114
Seat belts Warning triangle
49-51 52 52
Airbags Interior mirror
Overview
96-99 76
93-95 182
Interior fittings
71-72
- 12 V accessory socket
- USB port / Auxiliary socket
- mats
Deactivating the passenger's front
airbag
97, 102
Parking brake
121
Moving off on a slope
130
5
Overview
Instruments and controls
On the left
Lighting. 77-80
Main or dipped beam headlamps. Front and rear foglamps. Direction indicators.
84
Steering mounted controls for the touch screen: volume, change source.
228
Cruise control. Speed limiter.
136-138 134-135
Memorise speeds. 139-140
"-" Change down (if electronic gearbox).
123-124
6
On the right
Screen wash/wipe. 87-89
Trip computer. 30
Intermittent rear wipe.
88
Steering mounted controls for the touch screen.
228
Adjust the steering wheel. 48
Front airbag.
96-97
Steering mounted controls for the audio system.
297, 317
"+" Change up (if electronic gearbox).
123-124
Overview
Activate Park Assist. or
147-150
Deactivate the rear parking sensors.
144-145
Deactivate the DSC/ASR system.
90-92
Deactivate Stop & Start. 131-133
Side switch panel*
Adjust the headlamp beam height. 85
Reinitialise the under-inflation detection (without touch screen).
151-153
Deactivate volumetric alarm monitoring.
41-42
Activate the electric child lock. 114
A lamp indicates the state of the function.
* Depending on version. 7
Overview
Centre console
8
Middle console
Touch screen. 225-293
Bluetooth audio system. 295-313
Audio system. 315-326
Hazard warning lamps. 90
Central
locking.
40
Heating / Ventilation.
59-60
Manual air conditioning.
61-62
Demisting / Defrosting (rear screen, mirrors, windscreen, side windows).
66-67
Dual-zone automatic air conditioning.
63-65
Overview
Upper console
Lower console
Peugeot Connect Assistance. 223
12 V socket.
Gearbox
Manual 5.
Manual 6.
Electronic 5. 72
122 122 123-125
Peugeot Connect SOS. 222
USB port / Jack auxiliary socket. 72
Electronic 6.
123-125
Courtesy lamp switches. 68
Automatic 4 / Automatic 6. 126-128
Active City Brake. 141-143
9
Overview
Underbonnet view
AdBlue® additive
174-180
Checking
levels
89, 168-172, 178-179
- oil
- brake fluid
- coolant
- screenwash fluid
- additive (HDi Diesel AdBlue®)
Checks and maintenance 168-169, 173
- air filter - oil, oil filter - particle filter (Diesel) - brake fluid - brake pads / discs
Changing bulbs - front - rear
195-201
Running out of fuel, Diesel
214
Opening the bonnet Under the bonnet, petrol Under the bonnet, Diesel Petrol engines Diesel engines
167 168 169 215-216 215, 217
12V battery
208-211
Load reduction, economy mode
161
Engine compartment fuses
202-203, 207
Dashboard fuses
202-206
Petrol weights Diesel weights
215-216 215, 217
Identification markings Dimensions
220 218-219
10
Instrument panels
Instruments
1
Rev counter
Rev counter (x 1000 rpm), graduation depends on the engine (petrol or Diesel).
Control button
Recall the servicing information. Adjust the time. Reset the function selected (service indicator or trip recorder). Depending on version: - Adjust the time. - Digital speedometer.
Speedometer
Analogue speedometer (km/h or mph).
Indicator
Instrument panel lighting
Main lighting dimmer.
Engine coolant temperature indicator.
Instrument panel ambience lighting.
Fuel gauge
Fuel level in the tank.
11
Instruments
Display screens
12
Cruise control settings. Speed limiter settings. Service indicator.
Odometer (km or miles). Trip recorder (km or miles).
Engine oil level indicator (depending on version).
Gear shift indicator with a manual gearbox.
Selector position and gear with an electronic gearbox. Selector position and gear with an automatic gearbox.
Digital speedometer (km/h or mph).
This function can be deactivated by a long press on this button (depending on version).
Trip computer
Stop & Start time counter.
Gearbox
Park position.
Remaining driving range.
Reverse.
Current or average fuel consumption.
Neutral.
Average speed of the vehicle. Distance travelled by the vehicle.
Automatic mode. Manual mode.
Change up/ Change down.
Sport programme. Snow programme.
Instruments
1
13
Instruments
Library of indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps
indicator lamp informing that a system is switched on,
warning lamp for preventive purposes or for a fault.
When the ignition is switched on
Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds in the instrument panel and/or instrument panel screen when the vehicle's ignition is switched on. When the engine is started, these same warning lamps should go off. If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information in the table on the warning lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
The illumination of certain warning lamps may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel or multifunction screen. The warning lamps may come on continuously (fixed) or flash. Certain warning lamps may come on in one of two modes. Only by relating the type of lighting to the operating status of the vehicle can it be ascertained whether the situation is normal or whether a fault has occurred.
14
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Parking brake
fixed.
Foot on the brake pedal
fixed.
flashing.
Diesel engine pre-heating
fixed.
Instruments
Cause The parking brake is applied or not properly released.
The brake pedal must be pressed.
Action/ Observations
Release the parking brake to switch off the warning lamp, keeping your foot on the brake pedal. Observe the safety recommendations. For more information on the parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.
With an electronic gearbox, press the brake pedal to start the engine (lever in position N). With an automatic gearbox, with the engine running, press the brake pedal before releasing the parking brake, to unlock the lever and come out of position P. If you wish to release the parking brake without pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will remain on.
1
With an electronic gearbox, if you hold the vehicle on an incline using the accelerator for too long, the clutch overheats.
Use the brake pedal and/or the parking brake.
The key is at position 2 (ignition on) in the ignition switch.
Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting. The period of illumination of the warning lamp is determined by the ambient conditions (up to about 30 seconds in very low temperatures). If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again, then start the engine.
15
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Foot on the clutch
fixed.
Stop & Start
fixed.
flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.
Automatic wiping
fixed.
Cause
Action/ Observations
In the STOP mode of Stop & Start, changing to START mode is refused because the clutch pedal is not fully down.
You must declutch fully to allow the change to engine START mode.
When the vehicle stops (red lights, traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start system has put the engine into STOP mode.
The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to move off.
STOP mode is temporarily unavailable. Or START mode is invoked automatically.
For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the corresponding section.
The wiper control is pushed downwards.
Automatic front wiping is activated. To deactivate automatic wiping, operate the control stalk downwards or put the stalk into another position.
Passenger's airbag system
fixed.
The control, located in the glove box, is set to the OFF position. The passenger's front airbag is deactivated. You can install a rearward facing child seat, unless there is a fault with the operation of the airbags (Airbag warning lamp on).
Set the control to the ON position to activate the passenger's front airbag. In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rearward facing position.
16
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Cause
STOP
fixed, associated with It is associated with the engine another warning lamp. oil pressure or the engine coolant
temperature.
Action/ Observations
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Park, switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop.
1
Service
fixed, associated with Major faults have occurred. another warning lamp.
Refer to the section on this warning lamp and you must then contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop.
fixed associated with a Faults have occurred for which there message (if a display is no specific warning lamp. screen is fitted).
Identify the fault by reading the message shown in the screen (if a display screen is fitted) and refer to the corresponding section: - engine oil level alert, - risk of blockage of the particle filter (Diesel), - Diesel fuel additive level (Diesel with particle
filter). You must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
17
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Braking
fixed.
Cause
The brake fluid level has dropped significantly.
Action/ Observations
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Top up with brake fluid listed by PEUGEOT. If the problem persists, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated
The electronic brake force distribution You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
with the ABS warning (EBFD) system has a fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
+
lamp.
workshop.
Maximum coolant temperature
fixed with the needle in the red zone.
The temperature of the cooling system is too high.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping up the level, if necessary. If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
fixed.
The anti-lock braking system has a fault.
The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
18
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Dynamic stability control (DSC/ASR)
flashing.
fixed.
Cause The DSC/ASR regulation is operating.
The DSC/ASR system has a fault.
Action/ Observations
The system optimises traction and improves the directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of grip or trajectory.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Power steering fixed.
The power steering has a fault.
Drive carefully at reduced speed. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Engine autodiagnosis system
fixed.
The emission control system has a fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop without delay.
flashing.
The engine management system has a fault.
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated with the A minor engine fault has been SERVICE warning lamp. detected.
fixed, associated with the STOP warning lamp.
A major engine fault has been detected.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
1
19
Instruments
Warning or indicator lamp in the instrument panel
State
Cause
AdBlue® additive (BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed, on switching on the ignition, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.
The remaining driving range is between 350 miles (600 km) and 1500 miles (2400 km).
Action/ Observations
Have the AdBlue® additive tank topped up as soon as possible: go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.
flashing, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.
The remaining driving range is between 0 and 350 miles (600 km).
You must top-up the AdBlue® additive tank to avoid a breakdown: go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.
flashing, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating that starting is prevented.
The AdBlue® tank is empty: the starting inhibition system required by legislation prevents starting of the engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must top-up the AdBlue® additive tank: go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, or carry out this operation yourself. It is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue® to the additive tank.
For topping-up or for more information on the AdBlue® additive, refer to the corresponding section.
20
Instruments
Warning or indicator lamp in the instrument panel
State
SCR emissions fixed, on switching
control system on the ignition,
(BlueHDi Diesel) associated with the
+
SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied
by an audible signal
+
and a message.
Cause
A fault with the SCR emissions control system has been detected.
Action/ Observations
This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions return to normal levels.
flashing, on switching on the ignition, associated with the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.
After confirmation of the fault with the emissions control system, you can drive for up to 650 miles (1 100 km) before the engine starting inhibition system is triggered.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
flashing, on switching on the ignition, associated with the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.
You have exceeded the authorised driving limit following confirmation of a fault with the emissions control system: the engine starting inhibition system prevents starting of the engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
1
21
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Low fuel level
fixed with the needle in the red zone.
Engine oil pressure
flashing with the needle in the red zone.
fixed.
Cause
Action/ Observations
There remains approximately 5 litres of fuel in the tank. At this point, you begin to use the fuel reserve.
There remains very little fuel in the tank.
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is made. Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres. Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as this could damage the emission control and injection systems.
There is a fault with the engine lubrication system.
You must stop as soon it is safe to do so. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Battery charge* fixed.
The battery charging circuit has a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, ...).
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Under-inflation fixed.
The pressure in one or more wheels is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible. This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold.
flashing then fixed,
The tyre pressure monitoring system Under-inflation detection is not assured.
accompanied by the has a fault or no sensor is detected Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
+
Service warning lamp. on one of the wheels.
qualified workshop.
* Depending on the country of sale. 22
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Cause
Door(s) open
fixed, associated with a message identifying the door, if the speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).
A door or the boot is still open.
fixed, associated with a message identifying the door, together with an audible signal if the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
Action/ Observations Close the door or boot.
Seat belt(s) not fastened/ unfastened
fixed then flashing accompanied by an increasing audible signal.
A seat belt has not been fastened or Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle. has been unfastened.
Airbags
on temporarily.
This lamp comes on for a few seconds when you turn on the ignition, then goes off.
This lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed.
One of the airbag or seat belt pretensioner systems has a fault.
Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
1
23
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Left-hand direction indicator
Right-hand direction indicator
Sidelamps
Flashing with audible signal.
Flashing with audible signal.
fixed.
Cause The lighting stalk has been pushed down.
The lighting stalk has been pushed up.
The lighting control stalk is in the "Sidelamps" position.
Action/ Observations When changing lane.
On manual operation of the lighting or in automatic mode.
Dipped beam headlamps
fixed.
The lighting control stalk is at the "Dipped beam" position.
Main beam headlamps
fixed.
The lighting control stalk has been pulled toward you.
Pull the control stalk again to return to dipped beam.
Front foglamps fixed.
Rear foglamp
fixed.
The front foglamps are switched on using the ring on the lighting control stalk.
Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearward once to switch off the front foglamps.
The rear foglamp has been switched on using the ring on the lighting control stalk.
Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk to the rear to switch off the rear foglamp.
24
Instruments
Engine coolant temperature
With the engine running, when the needle is: - in zone A, the temperature of the engine
coolant is correct, - in zone B, the temperature of the engine
coolant is too high; the maximum temperature and the central STOP warning lamps come on, accompanied by an audible signal and a warning message in the screen. You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Checking the level
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature and pressure in the cooling system increase. To top up the level: F wait at least one hour for the engine to
cool, F unscrew the cap two turns to allow the
pressure to drop, F when the pressure has dropped, remove
the cap, F top up the level to the "MAX" mark.
Be aware of the risk of burns when topping up the cooling system. Do not fill above the maximum level (indicated on the header tank).
Level
The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" mark but should never exceed it. When the engine is warm, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan.
The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might be caught by the fan blades.
Changing the coolant
The coolant does not have to be replaced at routine services.
Fluid specification
The coolant must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.
1
25
Instruments
Servicing
This is a countdown between the intervals given in the manufacturer's service schedule.
It is calculated from the last reset of the service indicator, according to the mileage covered and the time elapsed since the last service.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions only (depending on the country of sale), the degree of deterioration of the engine oil is also taken into account.
The vehicle's odometer is displayed in area A of the display screen and the trip recorder in area B.
The service indicator appears when approaching a servicing point: - it indicates the distance before the next
service is due, - it displays the servicing interval in
two ways,
- it remains displayed if the service is overdue,
The service indicator does not appear if it is more than 2 000 miles (3 000 km) before the next service is due.
26
Instruments
Servicing reminder
Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due
For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner symbolising the service operations comes on. The distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due. Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before the next service is due. For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:
7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner goes off; the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The screen then indicates the total and trip distances.
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due
Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before the next service is due. For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:
7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on to indicate that a service must be carried out soon.
Service overdue
For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner flashes to indicate that the service must be carried out as soon as possible. Example: the service is overdue by 186 miles (300 km). For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:
7 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on.
1
27
Instruments
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, this alert is also accompanied by the fixed illumination of the Service warning lamp, when the ignition is switched on. The distance remaining may be weighted by the time factor, depending on the driving conditions. Therefore, the spanner may also come on if you have exceeded the period since the last service, indicated in the manufacturer's service schedule. For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the spanner can also come on early, according to the degree of deterioration of the engine oil. The deterioration of the engine oil depends on the conditions in which the vehicle is used.
Resetting the service indicator
Advice
After each service, the service indicator must be reset to zero. If you have carried out the service on your vehicle yourself: F switch off the ignition, F press and hold the trip distance recorder
reset button, F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown, F when the display indicates "=0", release
the button; the spanner disappears.
Retrieving the service information
You can access the service information at any time. F Press the trip distance recorder reset
button. The service information is displayed for a few seconds, then disappears.
Trip recorder reset
If you have to disconnect the battery following this operation, lock the vehicle and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to be registered.
With the trip mileage displayed, press the button for a few seconds.
28
Touch screen
As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations that require close attention, with the vehicle stationary. Some functions are not accessible when driving.
Instruments
1
It gives access to: - menus for adjusting settings for vehicle
functions and systems, - audio and display configuration menus, - audio system and telephone controls and
the display of associated information.
And, depending on equipment, it allows: - the display of alert messages and the
visual parking sensors information, - access to the controls for the navigation
system and Connected Services, and the display of associated information.
Recommendations
It is necessary to press firmly, particularly for "flick" gestures (scrolling through lists, moving the map...). A light wipe is not enough. The screen does not recognise pressing with more than one finger. This technology allows use at all temperatures and when wearing gloves. Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen. Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the touch screen.
State of indicator lamps
Some buttons contain an indicator lamp that gives the state of the corresponding function. Green indicator: you have switched on the corresponding function. Orange indicator: you have switched off the corresponding function.
29
Instruments
Trip computer
Instrument panel screen
Trip reset
F Each press on the end of the wiper control stalk displays the information in turn.
- The current information with: the range, the current fuel consumption, the Stop & Start time counter.
- Trip "1" with: the average speed, the average fuel consumption, the distance travelled, for the first trip.
- Trip "2" with: the average speed, the average fuel consumption, the distance travelled, for the second trip.
30
F When the trip required is displayed, press the control for more than 2 seconds or use the left hand thumb wheel of the steering mounted controls.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical. For example, trip "1" can be used for daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Advice
Even though the definition of each type of information is common, the symbols are not; the touch screen symbols are shown.
Instruments
Touch screen
F Press the MENU button to display the main menu.
F Select the "Driving" menu. F Select the desired tab using your finger.
Successively:
Current information
Range (miles or km) The distance that can be travelled using the remaining fuel in the tank (based on the average fuel consumption over the last few miles).
This value can vary following a change in driving conditions or the relief of the road, giving rise to a big difference in current fuel consumption.
Once the remaining range is below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After topping-up with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and displayed if it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
If dashes instead of figures continue to be displayed when driving, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Current fuel consumption (l/100 km or km/l or mpg) Calculated over the last few seconds.
This function is only displayed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Stop & Start time counter (if function present) (In minutes/ seconds hours/ minutes) If your vehicle has Stop & Start, a time counter records the periods in STOP mode during a journey. It is reset to zero every time the ignition is switched on using the key.
1
31
Instruments
Trip "1" Trip "2"
Trip reset
For each separate trip:
Average fuel consumption (l/100 km or km/l or mpg) Calculated since the last time the trip was reset.
Average speed (km/h or mph) Calculated since the last time the trip was reset.
Distance travelled (km or miles) Calculated since the last time the trip was reset.
F When the desired trip is displayed, press the reset button.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical. For example, trip "1" can be used for daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
32
Date and time
Touch screen
Press MENU to display the "MAIN MENU".
Select "Settings".
Select "Secondary page".
Select "Adjust time" or "Adjust date".
Instruments
Instrument panel
1
F Each press of this button moves between the following settings:
- hours, - minutes, - 12 or 24 hour format.
In the secondary page, select "Time/ Date".
Modify the setting using the virtual keypad then confirm.
Press "Confirm" to save and quit.
33
Instruments
Lighting dimmer
System for the manual adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel and the touch screen to suit the ambient light level.
Two buttons
With the exterior lighting on: F Press this button to increase the brightness.
F Press this button to reduce the brightness.
As soon as the lighting reaches the required level of brightness, release the button.
One button
Touch screen
F Press this button to adjust the brightness,
F release the button when the desired level is reached.
Adjustment
F Press MENU to display the "MAIN MENU".
F Select "Settings".
With the vehicle lighting off or in day mode (daytime running lamps on), pressing the button has no effect.
F Select "Secondary page". F Select "Screen settings".
F Adjust the brightness by moving the cursor.
34
Remote control
A. Unfolding / Folding. B. Unlocking.
Disarming the alarm. C. Locking.
Locating the vehicle. Arming the alarm.
Doors
Complete unlocking
Using the key
F Turn to the front.
Using the remote control
F Press.
Access
Using the remote control
F Press once to unlock the driver's door only.
2
F Press twice in succession to unlock the other doors and the boot.
Selective unlocking
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
In the "Driving assistance" menu
This is set in the "Driving assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings" and "Vehicle access".
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing of the direction indicators for approximately 2 seconds. According to version, the electric door mirrors unfold at the same time as the first unlocking action.
35
Access
3-door
Locating your vehicle
F A press switches on the vehicle's lighting and flashes the direction indicators for a few seconds to help you locate your vehicle in a car park.
Access to the rear seats
Folding the front seat forward
Guide-me-home lighting
Make a long press on this button to operate the guide-me-home lighting (switching on the sidelamps, dipped beams and number plate lamps).
A second press before the end of the timed period cancels the guide-me-home lighting.
Standard model
F Pull only this control upwards to fold the backrest and slide the whole seat forward.
The front seat returns to its original position when straightening the backrest.
Sport model
F Pull only this control forward to fold the seat backrest and move the whole seat forward.
The front seat returns to its original position when straightening the backrest.
Ensure that no object or person might prevent the seat runners returning to their original position; the return to this position is necessary to secure the seat. Ensure that the seat belt has reeled in correctly so as to not impede passengers' access to the rear seats.
36
Locking - Key
Locking
Using the key
F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle.
Using the remote control
F Press.
Maintaining the locking action (key or remote control) automatically closes the windows.
Locking is confirmed by fixed illumination of the direction indicators for approximately 2 seconds. According to version, the electric door mirrors fold at the same time. The folding and unfolding of the electric door mirrors can be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Access
If one of the doors or the boot is still open or if an electronic key has been left inside the vehicle, the locking does not take place. When the vehicle is locked, if it is unlocked inadvertently, it will automatically lock itself again after about 30 seconds, unless a door is opened.
Folding the key
2
As a safety measure (passengers on board), never leave the vehicle, even for a short period, without taking your key with you.
F Press this button before folding the key.
If you do not press the button, there is a risk of damaging the remote control.
37
Access
Back-up door locking
For mechanically locking and unlocking the doors in the event of a fault with the central locking system or a battery failure.
Driver's door
Insert the key in the lock to lock or unlock the door.
Passenger doors
F On the rear doors, check that the child lock is not on.
F Remove the black cap located on the edge of the door, using the key.
F Insert the key into the aperture without forcing, then without turning, move the latch sideways towards the inside of the door.
F Remove the key and refit the cap.
38
Deadlocking
(depending on version) Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior door controls inoperative. It also deactivates the manual central control button. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Using the remote control
F Press. F Press again within 5 seconds to
deadlock the vehicle.
Using the key
F Turn the key to the rear in the driver's door lock.
F Turn the key to the rear again within 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed illumination of the direction indicators for approximately 2 seconds. Depending on version, the electric door mirrors fold at the same time.
Access
2
39
Access
From the inside
Unlocking
F Press the button again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Locking
F Press the button.
This allows the doors and the boot to be locked. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
If one of the doors is open, locking of the doors from the inside does not take place.
When locking / deadlocking from outside When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked from outside, the switch does not operate. F After normal locking, pull the
interior door lever to unlock the vehicle. F After deadlocking, you have to use the remote control or the key to unlock the vehicle.
Automatic central locking
The doors can lock automatically while driving (speed above 6 mph [10 km/h]). To turn this function on or off (on by default).
F press and hold the button until there is an audible signal and/or a message in the screen.
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
40
Access
Alarm
The alarm provides the following types of monitoring:
- Exterior perimeter
The system checks for opening of the vehicle. The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a door, the boot, the bonnet...
- Interior volumetric
The system checks for any variation in the volume in the passenger compartment. The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a window, enters the passenger compartment or moves inside the vehicle.
- Tilt*
The system monitors changes in the attitude of the vehicle. The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted, moved or damaged. For all work on the alarm system, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Self-protection function
The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central control or the siren wiring is put out of service or damaged.
Total protection
Activation F Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.
F Press the locking button on the remote control.
The alarm monitoring system is active (armed): the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second. Timing: The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated after a delay of 5 seconds. The interior volumetric monitoring after a delay of 45 seconds. If an opening (door, boot...) is not closed fully, the vehicle is not locked but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be activated after a delay of 45 seconds at the same time as the interior volumetric monitoring.
Automatic activation (depending on version) Monitoring is active 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is closed. F To avoid triggering the alarm on entering
the vehicle, first press the button on the remote control before opening a door.
Deactivation F Press the unlocking button on the remote control. The alarm system is switched off (disarmed): the indicator lamp in the button goes off.
* On GTi version.
2
41
Access
Protection - perimeter monitoring only
Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring (and tilt monitoring, if fitted to your vehicle) to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in certain cases such as: - the presence of a pet in the vehicle, - a window partially open, - washing your vehicle.
Deactivation of the volumetric monitoring Tilt monitoring is deactivated, if fitted to your vehicle. F Switch off the ignition.
F Within ten seconds, press the button until the indicator lamp is on continuously.
F Get out of the vehicle. F Press the locking button on the
remote control immediately.
The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is activated: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second.
To be effective, the deactivation must be carried out each time the ignition is switched off.
Locking the vehicle without activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key in the driver's door lock.
Triggering of the alarm
When the alarm is triggered the siren sounds and the direction indicators flash for thirty seconds. The monitoring functions remain active until the alarm has been triggered eleven times in succession.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in the button informs you that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on, this flashing stops immediately.
Advice
Remote control fault
To deactivate the monitoring functions: F Unlock the vehicle using the key in the
driver's door lock. F Open the door; the alarm is triggered. F Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops. The
indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Alarm fault
When the ignition is switched on, fixed illumination of the indicator lamp in the button indicates a fault with the system. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
42
Boot
Opening
Closing
F Lower the tailgate using the interior grab handle.
F If necessary, press down on the tailgate to fully close it.
Advice
Access
2
Using the key. Using the remote control.
F After unlocking the boot or the vehicle, press the opening control which releases the tailgate, and then guide it open.
Boot still open
With the engine running, this is signalled by: - this warning lamp coming on, - an alert message displayed for a
few seconds.
With the vehicle moving (speed higher than 6 mph (10 km/h)), this is signalled by: - this warning lamp coming on, - an alert message displayed for a
few seconds, - an audible signal.
Tailgate release
System for mechanical unlocking of the boot in the event of a central locking malfunction.
Unlocking
F Fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the tailgate.
43
Access
Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control malfunction, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle. F First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
or lock your vehicle. F Then, reinitialise the remote control. If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
Reinitialisation
F Switch off the ignition. F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition). F Press the closed padlock immediately for a
few seconds. F Switch off the ignition and remove the key
from the ignition switch. The remote control is fully operational again.
Changing the battery
Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment. Take them to an approved collection point.
Battery ref.: CR1620 / 3 volts.
If the battery is flat, you are informed by lighting of this warning lamp in the instrument panel, an audible signal and a message in the screen. F Unclip the cover using a screwdriver in the cutout. F Remove the cover. F Extract the flat battery from its location. F Place the new battery into its location observing the original direction. F Clip the cover in place.
44
Access
Lost keys
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal identification documents and if possible the key code label. The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to look up the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions.
Second-hand vehicle
Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.
2
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it. Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised. No remote control can operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition is switched off, except for reinitialisation.
Locked vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency. As a safety precaution, never leave children alone in the vehicle, except for a very short period. In all cases, it is essential to remove the key from the ignition switch when leaving the vehicle.
45
Access
Window controls
Manual mode
Open
Press the control without going past the point of resistance. The window stops as soon as the control is released.
Automatic mode
(depending on version)
Open
Press the control, going past the point of resistance. The window opens completely after releasing the control. Pressing again stops the movement of the window.
Close
Pull the control, going past the point of resistance. The window closes completely after releasing the control. Pulling again stops the movement of the window.
Anti-pinch
(depending on version)
When the window rises and meets an obstacle, it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
In the event of unwanted opening of the window when closing automatically, press the control until the window opens completely, then pull the control immediately until the window closes. Continue to hold the control for approximately 1 second after the window has closed. The safety anti-pinch function is not active during this operation.
Close
Pull the control without going past the point of resistance. The window stops as soon as the control is released.
Inhibit the rear controls.
The electric window controls remain operational for approximately 1 minute after the key has been removed. Once this time has elapsed, the electric windows will not operate. To reactivate them, switch the ignition on again.
46
Access
Inhibition
For the safety of your children, press the control to prevent operation of the windows of the rear doors, irrespective of their position.
With the warning lamp on, the rear switches are deactivated. With the warning lamp off, the switches are active.
Advice
Reinitialisation
Following reconnection of the battery, the safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. The safety anti-pinch is not active during these operations: - lower the window completely, then raise
it; it will rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the switch is pressed. Repeat the operation until the window closes completely, - press and hold the switch upwards for at least 1 second after reaching this position, window closed.
Always remove the key when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time. In the event of contact during operation of the windows, you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this, press the switch concerned. When operating the passenger electric window controls, the driver must ensure that no one prevents the correct closing of the windows. The driver must ensure that passengers use the electric windows correctly. Be aware of children when operating the windows.
2
47
Ease of use and comfort
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit
Adjusting the steering wheel
To make the most of the special ergonomics of the Peugeot i-Cockpit, adjust in the following order: - the height of the head restraint, - the seat backrest angle, - the seat cushion height, - the longitudinal position of the seat, - the reach and then height of the steering
wheel, - the interior and door mirrors.
F When stationary, pull the control lever to release the steering wheel adjustment mechanism.
F Adjust the height and reach of the wheel to suit your driving position.
F Push the control lever to lock the steering wheel adjustment mechanism.
Once these adjustments have been made, ensure that from your driving position you can see the "head-up" instrument panel clearly, over the reduced diameter steering wheel.
As a safety measure, this operation must only be carried out with the vehicle stationary.
48
Front seats
Standard
Adjustments Forwards-backwards
Height
Ease of use and comfort
3
Backrest
F Raise the control and slide the seat forwards or backwards.
F Pull the control upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, as many times as required, to obtain the position required.
F Push the control rearwards.
49
Ease of use and comfort
Head restraints
The head restraint has a frame with notches which prevent it from lowering; this is a safety device in case of impact. The adjustment is correct when the upper edge of the head restraint is level with the top of the head. Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and adjusted correctly.
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of jamming the seat caused by the presence of objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement immediately.
F To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards. F To remove the head restraint, press the
lug A and pull the head restraint upwards. F To put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint stems in the openings, keeping them in line with the seat back. F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A and the head restraint at the same time.
50
Bucket seats
Adjustments Forwards-backwards
Height
Ease of use and comfort
3
Backrest
F Lift the control and slide the seat forwards or backwards.
F Pull the handle upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, as many times as necessary to obtain the required position.
F Push the handle towards the rear and move the seat backrest forwards or backwards.
51
Ease of use and comfort
Additional adjustments
Heated seats
With the engine running, the front seats can be heated separately. F Use the adjustment wheel, select the level
of heating required: 0: Off. 1: Low. 2: Medium. 3: High.
Armrest
Comfort and storage system for the driver and front passenger.
Cover with opening lever F Lift the lever to raise the lid.
Storage space in the console F Pull the armrest fully up.
52
One-piece rear seats
Bench seat with fixed one-piece cushion and folding one-piece backrest.
Backrest
Ease of use and comfort
3
Folding the backrest
F Move the front seats forward if necessary. F Position the outer seat belts on the
backrest and buckle them. F Lower the head restraints to the lowest
position.
F Release the seat backrest 2 by press both controls 1 simultaneously.
F Fold the seat backrest 2 on to the fixed cushion.
Raising the seat backrest
F Raise the seat backrest 2. F Latch the backrest in place, the red
indicators on the controls 1 are no longer visible. F Unbuckle and return the outer seat belts to their normal positions ready for use.
53
Ease of use and comfort
Head restraints
These have one position for use (up) and a stowed position (down).
2/3 - 1/3 split bench rear seat
Bench seat with fixed one-piece cushion and split backrest (left hand 2/3, right hand 1/3) which can be folded individually to adapt the load space in the boot.
Seat backrest
They can be removed and are interchangeable side to side. To remove a head restraint: F pull the head restraint fully up, F then, press the lug A.
Folding the backrest
F Move the corresponding front seat forward if necessary.
F Position the corresponding outer seat belt against the backrest and buckle it.
F Fully lower or remove the head restraint.
F Release the backrest by pressing control 1 for the seat backrest 2.
F Fold the seat backrest 2 on to the fixed cushion.
The rear cushion is not removable.
54
Ease of use and comfort
When folding the seat, the centre seat belt should not be fastened, but laid out flat on the seat.
Head restraints
These have one position for use (up) and a stowed position (down).
When repositioning the seat backrest, take care not to trap the seat belts.
3
Repositioning the seat backrest
F Raise the seat backrest 2. F Secure it, checking that the red indicator in
the control 1 is no longer visible. F Unbuckle and reposition the seat belts
ready for use. F Refit the head restraint(s).
The rear seat cushion does not fold, just the seat backrest can be folded to increase the boot loading space.
They can be removed and are interchangeable side to side. To remove a head restraint: F pull the head restraint fully up, F then, press the lug A.
Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be fitted and correctly adjusted.
55
Ease of use and comfort
Ventilation
General points
Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger compartment is filtered and originates either from the outside via the grille located at the base of the windscreen or from the inside in air recirculation mode.
Control panel
The controls of this system are grouped together on the control panel on the centre console.
Air intake flow
The incoming air follows various paths depending on the controls selected by the driver: - direct arrival in the passenger
compartment (air intake), - passage through a heating circuit (heating), - passage through a cooling circuit (air
conditioning).
Air distribution
The incoming air is distributed via various outlets: - windscreen demisting-defrosting vents, - front side window demisting-defrosting
vents, - side adjustable air vents, - central adjustable air vents, - air outlets to the front footwells, - air outlets to the rear footwells.
56
Ease of use and comfort
Advice
In order for the ventilation and air conditioning to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance guidelines below: F To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well as the air extractor located in the boot. F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation of the air conditioning system. F The air conditioning system only works with the engine running. F Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month to keep it in perfect working order. F Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter elements replaced regularly. We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits). F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have it checked regularly as recommended in the warranty and maintenance record. F If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability.
If after an extended stop in sunshine, the interior temperature is very high, first ventilate the passenger compartment for a few moments. Put the air flow control at a setting high enough to quickly change the air in the passenger compartment. The air conditioning system does not contain chlorine and does not present any danger to the ozone layer.
3
The condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the vehicle which is perfectly normal.
Passenger compartment filter
Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace it twice as often if necessary.
Stop & Start
The heating and air conditioning systems only work when the engine is running. To maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, you can temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start system. For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the corresponding section.
A clogged passenger compartment filter may have an adverse effect on the performance of the air conditioning system and generate undesirable odours. Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule.
57
Ease of use and comfort
Suggested interior settings
I require...
Air distribution
HOT
Heating or Manual air conditioning
Air flow
Recirculation of interior air / Intake of exterior air
Temperature
Manual AC
COLD
DEMISTING DEFROSTING Digital air conditioning: use the automatic mode in preference by pressing the "AUTO" button.
58
Heating / Ventilation
Manual mode
Ease of use and comfort
3
Temperature
F Turn the knob from blue (cold) to red (hot) to adjust the temperature to your wishes.
Air flow
F Turn the knob from position 1 to position 6, to obtain the desired air flow.
If you place the air flow control at position 0 (off), the temperature in the vehicle will no longer be maintained. However, a slight flow of air can still be felt due to the movement of the vehicle.
59
Ease of use and comfort
Air distribution
Windscreen and side windows.
Windscreen, side windows and footwells. Footwells.
Centre and side air vents.
The air distribution can be modulated by placing the knob at an intermediate position.
Air intake / Air recirculation
Recirculation of the air in the vehicle isolates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and fumes. Return to the intake of exterior air as soon as possible to avoid the risk of deterioration of air quality and misting.
F Press the button to recirculate the interior air: the indicator lamp is on.
F Press the button again to allow the intake of exterior air: the indicator lamp is off.
60
Air conditioning
Manual mode
Ease of use and comfort
3
Temperature
F To adjust the temperature, turn the knob from blue (cold) to red (hot) to suit your requirements.
Air flow
F To adjust the air flow, turn the knob from position 1 to position 6 to obtain a adequate air flow for your comfort.
If you put the air flow control in position 0 (system off), the temperature is no longer controlled. However, a slight flow of air can still be felt, resulting from the movement of the vehicle.
61
Ease of use and comfort
Air distribution
Windscreen and side windows.
Windscreen, side windows and footwells. Footwells.
Central and side vents.
The air distribution can be adapted by placing the dial in an intermediate position.
Air intake / Air recirculation
Air conditioning On / Off
The recirculation of interior air insulates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and smoke. Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible to prevent deterioration of the air quality and the formation of mist.
F Press the button to recirculate the interior air: the indicator lamp is on.
F Press the button again to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment: the indicator lamp is off.
The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed. It enables you to: - lower the temperature, in summer, - increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3 °C.
Switching on
F Press the "A/C" button, the button's indicator lamp comes on.
The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment control is in position "0".
To obtain cooled air more quickly, you can use recirculation of interior air for a few moments. Then return to fresh air intake.
Switching off
F Press the "A/C" button again, the button's indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off may affect comfort levels (humidity, condensation).
62
Dual-zone digital air conditioning
AUTO mode
Automatic programme
Ease of use and comfort
When the engine is cold, the air flow will only reach its optimum level gradually to prevent too great a distribution of cold air. In cold weather, it favours the distribution of warm air to the windscreen, the side windows and the footwells only.
3
Switching on
F Press the "AUTO" button repeatedly. The indicator lamp comes on at the first press; the mode activated appears in the digital air conditioning screen:
Provides soft and quiet operation by limiting air flow.
Temperature
Adjustment
The driver and front passenger can each set the temperature to suit their requirements. The value indicated in the screen corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Offers the best compromise between a comfortable temperature and quiet operation. Provides strong and effective air flow.
Switching off F Press the "empty fan" air flow button until the fan symbol disappears.
F Push the button down (blue) to reduce the value or up (red) to increase it.
A setting around 21 enables you to obtain an optimum level of comfort. Depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is usual. In addition, it is recommended that you avoid a left/right setting difference of more than 3.
63
Ease of use and comfort
On entering the vehicle, if the interior temperature is much colder or warmer than the comfort value, there is no need to alter the value displayed in order to obtain the required level of comfort. The system corrects the temperature difference automatically and as quickly as possible.
Auto - Visibility programme
Switching on F Press the "visibility" button for faster demisting or defrosting of the windscreen and side windows.
The system automatically manages the air conditioning, and the air intake, flow and distribution to the windscreen and side windows to the best effect.
Switching off F Press the "visibility" button again or the "AUTO" button, the indicator lamp in the button goes off and the indicator lamp in the "AUTO" button comes on.
The system reverts to the previous settings used.
64
Air conditioning
F Press the "AUTO" button again to return to the automatic comfort programme.
For maximum cooling or heating of the passenger compartment, you can exceed the minimum value of 14 or the maximum value of 28.
F Push the button down until "LO" is displayed or up until "HI" is displayed.
The air conditioning is designed to operate efficiently in all seasons, with the windows closed. It allows you: - in summer, to lower the temperature, - in winter, above 3 °C, to improve demisting.
Switching on F Press the "A/C" button, the associated indicator lamp comes on.
The air conditioning cannot operate when the air flow is set to off.
Switching off F Press the "A/C" button again; the associated indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off may cause some problems (humidity, misting).
Ease of use and comfort
Air distribution
F Press this button several times in succession to direct the air flow in turn towards:
- the windscreen, the side windows and the footwells,
- the windscreen and side windows (demisting or defrosting),
- the central and side vents, - the central vents, the side vents and the
footwells, - the footwells.
Air flow
F Press this "full fan" button to increase the air flow.
The air flow symbol (a fan) appears in the screen. It is filled in progressively in relation to the value required.
F Press this "empty fan" button to reduce the air flow.
Air intake/Air recirculation
Switching on
F Press this button to recirculate the interior air. The indicator lamp in the button comes on and the air recirculation symbol is displayed.
Air recirculation prevents exterior odours and fumes from entering the passenger compartment. It is activated automatically when operating the screen wash.
Switching off F As soon as possible, press this button again to permit the intake of exterior air and prevent misting. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Avoid prolonged operation in interior air recirculation mode (risk of misting and of deterioration of the air quality).
Manual mode
Depending on your requirements, you can make a different selection from that offered by the system by changing a setting. The other functions will still be controlled automatically.
When you modify a setting, the indicator lamp in the "AUTO" button goes off.
Switching the system off
F Press the "empty fan" air flow button until the fan symbol disappears and "---" appears.
This action switches off all of the functions of the air conditioning system. The temperature is no longer maintained at a comfortable level. However, a slight flow of air, due to the movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.
Avoid driving for too long with the system switched off (risk of misting and of deterioration of the air quality).
Pressing the "full fan" button reactivates the system with the settings prior to deactivation.
3
65
Ease of use and comfort
Demisting - defrosting
Windscreen
These markings on the control panel indicate the settings for rapid demisting or defrosting of the windscreen and side windows.
Manual air conditioning
Switching on
F Put the air flow, temperature and distribution controls to the dedicated marked position.
F Press the "A/C" button for air conditioning; the indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Switching off
F Press the "A/C" button again; the indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Dual-zone digital air conditioning
Auto - Visibility programme
Switching on
F Press the "visibility" button to demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows as quickly as possible.
The system automatically manages the air conditioning, air flow and air intake, and provides optimum distribution towards the windscreen and side windows.
Switching off
F Press the "visibility" button again or on "AUTO"; the indicator lamp in the button goes off and the indicator lamp in the "AUTO" button comes on.
The system reverts to the previous settings.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the STOP mode is not available.
66
Ease of use and comfort
Rear screen
The control button is located on the air conditioning system control panel.
The rear screen demisting/defrosting can only operate when the engine is running.
Door mirrors
Demisting - Defrosting
To demist or defrost the electric door mirrors, with the engine running press the heated rear window switch.
On
F Press this button to demist/ defrost the rear screen and (depending on version) the electric door mirrors. The indicator lamp associated with the button comes on.
Off
The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current.
F It is possible to stop the demisting/defrosting operation before it is switched off automatically by pressing the button again. The indicator lamp associated with the button goes off.
Advice
F Switch off the demisting/defrosting of the rear screen and electric door mirrors as soon as appropriate, as lower current consumption results in reduced fuel consumption.
3
67
Ease of use and comfort
Courtesy lamp
1. Courtesy lamp 2. Map reading lamps 68
In this position, the lighting comes on gradually:
- when the vehicle is unlocked, - when the key is removed from the ignition, - when opening a door, - when unlocking with the remote control.
It goes off gradually: - when the vehicle is locked, - when the ignition is switched on, - 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Map reading lamps
F With the ignition on, press the corresponding switch.
Take care to avoid leaving anything in contact with the courtesy lamp.
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time varies according to the circumstances: - with the ignition off, approximately
10 minutes, - in energy economy mode, approximately
30 seconds, - with the engine running, unlimited.
Mood lighting
Switching on
At night, panoramic sunroof light-emitting diodes (LEDs) come on automatically when the sidelamps are switched on.
Switching off
The interior mood lighting switches off automatically when the sidelamps are switched off.
Settings
Settings for the mood lighting can be adjusted via the vehicle settings menu in the touch screen.
Ease of use and comfort
3
69
Ease of use and comfort
Sunroof blind
Opening
F Take the blind by its handle and push it rearward to the desired position.
70
Closing
F Take the blind by its handle and pull it forward to the desired position.
Interior fittings
Glove box
Placed in the lower dashboard, it has a lid with a grip that is raised to open it. It may house: F the handbook pack. F a water bottle.
Mats
Fitting
Ease of use and comfort
Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side: F position the mat correctly, F refit the fixings by pressing, F check that the mat is secured correctly.
3
Large open storage
It is in the location for an audio system (depending on version).
Open storage
At the foot of the centre console: - 2 locations for standard size cups or cans. Door pockets.
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the driver's side use only the fixings provided in the wallet attached. The other mats are simply placed on the carpet.
Below a front seat
Location for the warning triangle in its cover or storage box.
Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side: F move the seat as far back as possible, F unclip the fixings, F remove the mat.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - only use mats which are suited to
the fixings already present in the vehicle; these fixings must be used, - never fit one mat on top of another. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control / speed limiter. The mats approved by PEUGEOT have two fixings located below the seat.
71
Ease of use and comfort
Ports and sockets - Connectivity
12 V socket
USB port / Jack auxiliary socket
F To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and connect a suitable adaptor.
Do not exceed the maximum power rating of the socket (otherwise there is a risk of damaging your portable device).
The connection of an electrical device not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a USB charger, may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems, causing faults such as poor telephone reception or interference with displays in the screens.
This connection box, consisting of an USB port and a JACK auxiliary socket is located on the centre console. It allows the connection of portable device, such as a digital audio player of the iPod® type or a USB memory stick. It reads the audio files which are transmitted to your audio system and played via the vehicle's speakers. You can manage these files using the steering mounted controls or the audio system control panel and display them in the instrument panel screen.
When the USB port is used, the portable device charges automatically. While charging, a message is displayed if the current drawn by the portable device exceeds the power rating of the vehicle's port.
For more information on the use of this system, refer to the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
72
Boot fittings
1. Rear parcel shelf 2. Hooks 3. Boot lamp 4. Stowing rings (depending on version)
Ease of use and comfort
3
73
Ease of use and comfort
Rear parcel shelf
To remove the shelf: F unhook the two cords, F raise the shelf slightly, then remove it. To stow it: - vertically behind the rear seats, - vertically behind the front seats. To refit the shelf: F engage it in the supports on each side and
slide it up to the cut-outs, F raise it to refit the two cords.
74
Mirrors
Door mirrors
As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the blind spot.
Manual
Electric
Lighting and visibility
4
Adjustment F Operate the lever in the four directions to
adjust the angle of the mirror glass.
Folding F Fold the mirror manually to protect it when
the vehicle is parked. F Unfold it before moving off again. They do not have automatic heating.
Adjustment F Move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror. F Move control B in all four directions to
adjust. F Return control A to the central position.
Folding F Control A in the central position, pull it back
to fold the mirrors. F Pull it again to unfold them.
75
Lighting and visibility
Using the remote control
Adjustment F Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
to unfold the door mirrors. F When locking the vehicle, the mirrors fold
automatically.
Manual rear view mirror
If the mirrors are folded using control A, they will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked. It is necessary to press control A again.
The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear. Take this into account in order to correctly judge the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.
The automatic folding and unfolding of the rear view mirrors when using the remote control can be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Fold the mirrors when using an automatic car wash. If necessary, it is possible to fold the mirrors manually.
The rear view mirror has two positions: - day (normal), - night (anti-dazzle). To change from one to the other, push or pull the lever on the lower edge of the mirror.
76
Automatic rear view mirror
A sensor measuring the light from the rear of the vehicle, automatically and progressively adjusts the brightness of the mirror.
Lighting and visibility
Lighting
Main lighting
The vehicle has various exterior lamps: - sidelamps, to be seen, - dipped beam headlamps to see without
dazzling other drivers, - main beam headlamps to see clearly when
the road is clear.
Additional lighting
Other lamps are fitted to meet particular driving conditions: - a rear foglamp to better signal the
presence of the vehicle in foggy conditions, - front foglamps with cornering lighting, - daytime running lamps to be seen during
the day, - guide-me-home and welcome lighting for
leaving and entering the vehicle.
Automatic lighting functions
Various automatic lighting functions are also available depending on options: - guide-me-home lighting, - cornering lighting, - welcome lighting, - daytime running lamps, - automatic illumination of headlamps.
4
In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.
77
Lighting and visibility
Manual mode
Place the desired symbol against the marking. Lighting off (ignition off) / Daytime running lamps (engine running). Sidelamps only.
Dipped or main beam headlamps.
Dipping the headlamps
Pull the stalk to switch the lighting between dipped / main beam headlamps.
In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.
Display
Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel confirms the lighting switched on.
78
Lighting and visibility
AUTO mode
The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, when a low level of ambient light is detected or in certain cases of activation of the windscreen wipers. As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, the lamps are switched off automatically.
On
F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. Activation of the function is accompanied by a message in the screen.
Off
F Turn the ring to another position. Deactivation of the function is accompanied by a message in the screen.
Automatic guide-me-home lighting
Association with the automatic lighting provides the guide-me-home lighting with the following additional options: - selection of the lighting duration of 15, 30
or 60 seconds, - automatic activation of guide-me-home
lighting when the automatic illumination of headlamps is in operation.
Configuration
Switching on Press "MENU" to display the "MAIN MENU".
Select "Driving".
Select "Secondary page".
Select "Vehicle settings".
Select the "Driving assistance" tab.
Activate the "Guide me home" function.
Switching off
Deactivate the "Guide me home" function.
In the event of a fault with the sunshine sensor, the lighting comes on, this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel and/or a message appears in the screen, accompanied by an audible signal. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. In this case, the lighting will not come on automatically. Do not cover the sunshine sensor, coupled with the rain sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror; the associated functions would no longer be controlled.
4
79
Lighting and visibility
Manual guide-me-home lighting
Temporarily keeping the dipped beam headlamps on after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.
Parking lamps
On
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps using the lighting stalk.
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the function off.
Off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after a set time.
Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of the sidelamps on the traffic side only. F Within one minute of switching off the
ignition, operate the lighting control stalk up or down depending on the traffic side (for example: when parking on the left; lighting control stalk upwards; the right hand sidelamps are on).
Manual guide-me-home lighting is also available from the remote control lighting button (refer to the corresponding section).
This is confirmed by an audible signal and illumination of the corresponding direction indicator warning lamp in the instrument panel. To switch off the parking lamps, return the lighting control stalk to the middle position or switch on the ignition.
80
Foglamps
Lighting and visibility
4
The foglamps operate with dipped or main beam headlamps on.
Rear foglamp only
Front foglamps and rear foglamp
F To switch it on, turn the ring forwards. When the lighting is switched off automatically (with AUTO model), the foglamp and the dipped beam headlamps will remain on. F To switch it off, turn the ring rearwards.
Rotate and release the ring: F forwards a first time to switch on the front
foglamps, F forwards a second time to switch on the
rear foglamp, F rearwards a first time to switch off the rear
foglamp, F rearwards a second time to switch of the
front fog lamps.
When the headlamps switch off with automatic illumination of headlamps (AUTO model) or when the dipped beam headlamps are switched off manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain on. F Turn the ring rearwards to switch off
the foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off.
81
Lighting and visibility
In good or rainy weather, both day and night, the front foglamps and the rear foglamp are prohibited. In these situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers. They should only be used in fog or snow. In these weather conditions, it is your responsibility to switch on the foglamps and dipped beam headlamps manually as the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. Do not forget to switch off the front foglamps and the rear foglamp when they are no longer necessary.
Switching off the lamps when the ignition is switched off
On switching off the ignition, all of the lamps turn off immediately, except for dipped beam if guide-me-home lighting is activated.
Switching on the lamps after the ignition is switched off
To reactivate the lighting control, rotate the ring to the "0" position - lamps off, then to the desired position. On opening the driver's door a temporary audible signal warns the driver that the lighting is on. The lamps, with the exception of the sidelamps, switch off automatically after a maximum duration of 30 minutes to avoid discharging the battery.
82
Lighting and visibility
LED lamps
They come on when the engine is started. Depending on the country of sale, they are used for: - daytime running lamps* in day mode and
sidelamps in night mode (they are brighter when daytime running lamps), or - sidelamps in day and night mode.
Daytime running lamps
Daytime lighting, compulsory in certain countries, which comes on automatically when the engine is started making the vehicle more visible to other users.
This function is assured: - in countries where it is imposed by
regulations, by illumination of the dipped beam headlamps with the sidelamps and number plate lamps; this function cannot be deactivated. - for other countries where it is provided, by the use of dedicated lamps (bulbs or LEDs); this function can be activated or deactivated via the vehicle configuration menu. The lighting control stalk must be placed in the "0" or "AUTO" (day mode) position. Deactivation of the daytime running lamps is effective after operation of the lighting control stalk or after the next engine start; activation is effective immediately.
The instruments and controls (instrument panel, multifunction screen, air conditioning control panel, ...) are not illuminated, except in night mode with manual or automatic illumination of headlamps.
4
* Function that can be set in the vehicle configuration menu.
83
Lighting and visibility
Direction indicators
Three flashes
Move the stalk briefly upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the corresponding direction indicators will flash 3 times.
This function can be used at any speed, but it is particularly useful for changing lane on fast roads.
F Lower the lighting control stalk fully when moving to the left.
F Raise the lighting control stalk fully when moving to the right.
If you forget to cancel the direction indicators for more than 20 seconds, the volume of the audible signal will increase if the speed is above 40 mph (60 km/h).
84
Headlamp adjustment
Travelling abroad
If using your vehicle in a country that drives on the other side of the road, the headlamps must be adjusted to avoid dazzling on-coming drivers. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, the headlamp beams should be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle. 0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats. -. Intermediate setting 1. 5 people. -. 5 people + maximum authorised load. 2. Driver + maximum authorised load.
The initial setting is position "0".
Lighting and visibility
4
85
Lighting and visibility
Cornering lighting
With the dipped or main beam headlamps on, this function makes use of the beam from the front foglamp to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (approximately 40 km/h) (urban driving, winding road, intersections, parking manoeuvres...).
Without cornering lighting
Programming
The system is activated or deactivated in the vehicle configuration menu. The system is activated by default.
With cornering lighting
86
Activation
The system operates: - when the corresponding direction indicator
is switched on, or - from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.
Deactivation
The system does not operate: - below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel, - above 25 mph (40 km/h), - when reverse gear is engaged.
Wipers
Front Manual mode
The wipers are controlled directly by the driver.
AUTO mode
The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, when rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.
Lighting and visibility
4
Wipe
Fast (heavy rain).
Normal (moderate rain).
Intermittent (proportional to the speed of the vehicle). Park.
Single wipe (press down and release).
Switching on
Briefly push the control stalk downwards. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has been accepted.
Switching off
Briefly push the control stalk downwards again, or place the control stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2).
This warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and a message is displayed.
This warning lamp goes off in the instrument panel and a message is displayed.
87
Lighting and visibility
Single wipe
Pull the stalk briefly towards you.
Rear
The automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers must be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards, if the ignition has been off for more than 1 minute.
Park.
Configuration
On Press "MENU" to display the "MAIN MENU".
Select "Driving".
Select "Secondary page".
Unusual operation
If the wipers operate in intermittent mode when in AUTO mode, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Intermittent wipe. Wash-wipe (set duration).
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the sunshine sensor, located at the top of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror. Switch off the automatic rain sensitive wipers when using an automatic car wash. In winter, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers.
If a significant accumulation of snow or ice is present, or when using a bicycle carrier on the boot, deactivate the automatic rear wiper via the vehicle configuration menu.
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation if the windscreen wipers are operating.
Select "Vehicle settings".
Select the "Driving assistance" tab. Activate the "Auto rear wiper in reverse" function. This function is activated by default.
Off Deactivate the "Auto rear wiper in reverse" function.
88
Lighting and visibility
Windscreen wash
Pull the wiper stalk towards you. The windscreen wash, then the windscreen wipers, operate for a pre-determined time.
Advice Screenwash reservoir
4
Fluid specification
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, this fluid must not be topped-up or replaced with plain water. In wintry conditions, it is recommended that you use an ethyl alcohol or methanol based fluid.
Top-up the level when necessary.
F Open the bonnet and secure it with the stay.
F Identify the reservoir filler cap. F Open the blue filler cap. F Pour in screenwash fluid for optimum
cleaning.
89
Safety
Hazard warning lamps
Visual warning with of all the direction indicators flashing to alert other road users to a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.
F Press this button, all of the direction indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
Automatic operation
When braking in an emergency, depending on the deceleration, the lamps come on automatically. They switch off automatically the first time you accelerate. F You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
Roadholding
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) comprising the following systems: - anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), - emergency braking assistance, - wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction control, - dynamic stability control (DSC).
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
These systems improve the stability and manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking and contribute towards improved control in corners, in particular on poor or slippery road surfaces. The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of emergency braking. The electronic brake force distribution system manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.
Emergency braking assistance
In an emergency, this system enables you to reach the optimum braking pressure more quickly and therefore reduce the stopping distance. It is triggered in relation to the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
This system (also known as Traction Control) optimises traction in order to avoid wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine. It also improves the directional stability of the vehicle on acceleration.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
If there is a difference between the path followed by the vehicle and that required by the driver, this system monitors each wheel and automatically acts on the brake of one or more wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle to the required path, within the limits of the laws of physics.
90
Safety
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
The fixed illumination of this warning lamp indicates that there is a fault with the ABS.
The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive carefully at moderate speed.
When changing wheels (tyres and rims), ensure that these are approved for your vehicle. Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake pedal.
Dynamic stability control (DSC) and anti-slip regulation (ASR)
5
When this warning lamp comes on, coupled with the STOP and ABS warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, it indicates that there is a fault with the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD). You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. In both cases, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
In emergency braking, press very firmly and maintain this pressure.
These systems are activated automatically every time the vehicle is started.
The operation of the dynamic grip or trajectory control system is signalled by flashing of the warning lamp in the instrument panel, every time they are brought into play.
91
Safety
Limits of operation
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the DSC system, so that the wheels can spin freely and regain grip. However, it is recommended that the system be reactivated as soon as possible.
F Pressing switches off the DSC system, the indicator lamp in the button comes on. You can the spin the wheels to regain grip.
Advice
The DSC system is switched on automatically every time the engine is started or after reaching a speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). Except for the 1.6 litre THP 155, THP 200 and THP 208 engines, where the button has to be pressed; the indicator lamp in the button stays off.
Fixed illumination The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The DSC system offers exceptional safety in normal driving, but this should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed. The correct operation of the system depends on observation of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding the wheels (tyres and rims), the braking components, the electronic components and the PEUGEOT assembly and repair procedures. After an impact, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
F Pressing again switches the system back on.
92
Seat belts
At the front
Safety
5
The front seat belts are fitted with a pretensioning and force limiting system. This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants. The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on. The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so improving their protection.
Fastening
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle. F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
Height adjustment (5-door)
F To lower the attachment point, squeeze the control A and slide it downwards.
F To raise the attachment point, slide the control A upwards.
93
Safety
At the rear
Warning lamp
Not fastened / unfastened. This warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel when the ignition is switched on.
It remains on for a certain time if the front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Once this period has elapsed, the warning lamp goes off if the driver's seat belt is fastened. From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) this warning lamp flashes for 2 minutes accompanied by an audible signal of increasing volume. Once these 2 minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the driver and/or the front passenger fastens their seat belt.
The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point seat belt, with force limiter and, for the outer seats, an effort limiter.
Fastening
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle. F Guide the seat belt as it reels in. F On the outer seat belts, raise the bar to the
top of the backrest to prevent the tongue from knocking against the side trim.
Warning lamp
Unfastened. From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) and for 2 minutes, this warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal of increasing volume, when one or more rear passengers unfasten their seat belt. Once these two minutes have elapsed, this warning lamp remains on until the one or more rear passengers fasten their seat belt.
94
Safety
Advice
The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they are all fastened before setting off. Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, always fasten your seat belt, even for short journeys. Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as they will not fulfil their role fully. The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel permitting automatic adjustment of the length of the strap to your size. The seat belt is stowed automatically when not in use. Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly. The lower part of the strap must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder. The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic locking device which comes into operation in the event of a collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release the device by pulling the strap firmly and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
In order to be effective, a seat belt must: - be tightened as close to the body as
possible, - be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not twist, - be used to restrain only one person, - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying, - not be converted or modified to avoid affecting its performance. In accordance with current safety regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with the skills and equipment needed, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. Have your seat belts checked regularly by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, particularly if the straps show signs of damage. Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT dealers. After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter than one and a half metres. Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one person. Never allow a child to travel on your lap. For more information on child seats, refer to the corresponding section.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and seriousness of the impact, the pretensioning device may be deployed before and independently of the airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system. In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes on. Following an impact, have the seat belts system checked, and if necessary replaced, by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
5
95
Safety
Airbags
Front airbags
General information
System designed to contribute towards improving the safety of the occupants (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of violent collisions. The airbags supplement the action of the seat belts fitted with force limiters (all except the centre rear passenger belt). If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones: - in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute towards better protection of the occupants of the vehicle (with the exception of the rear centre passenger); immediately after the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants, - in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain roll-over conditions, the airbags may not be deployed; the seat belt alone contributes towards ensuring your protection in these situations.
The airbags do not operate when the ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once. If a second impact occurs (during the same or a subsequent accident), the airbag will not be deployed again.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone. B. Side impact zone.
Deployment of one or more of the airbags is accompanied by a slight emission of smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system. This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive individuals may experience slight irritation. The noise of detonation associated with the deployment of one or more airbags may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.
System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious front impact, in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and thorax. The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
Deployment
The airbags are deployed, except the passenger's front airbag if it has been deactivated, in the event of a serious front impact to all or part of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the rear of the vehicle. The front airbag inflates between the thorax and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, passenger's side to cushion their forward movement.
96
Deactivation
Only the passenger's front airbag can be deactivated. F With the ignition off, insert the key into
the passenger airbag deactivation switch. F Turn it to the "OFF" position, F Remove the key keeping the switch in the
new position.
When the ignition is on, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel while the airbag is deactivated.
To assure your child's safety, you must deactivate the passenger's front airbag when you install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Reactivation
When you remove the rearward facing child seat, with the ignition on, turn the switch to the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and so assure the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.
Safety
5
97
Safety
Lateral airbags
Deployment
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle. The curtain airbag inflates between the front or rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest, between the hip and the shoulder. Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest frame, door side.
Deployment
A lateral airbag is deployed unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle. The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding door trim panel.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone. B. Side impact zone.
Curtain airbags
System which contributes towards improving the protection of the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.
In the event of a minor impact or bump on the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be deployed. In the event of a rear or front collision, the airbag is not deployed.
98
Safety
Advice
Sit in a normal upright position. Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Do not allow anything to come between the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, object...), do not attach or fix anything near to the airbags or their trajectories when inflating as this could cause injuries when the airbags are deployed. Never modify the original definition of your vehicle, particularly in the area directly around the airbags. After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems checked. All work on the airbag system must be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel. Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard. Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe. Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently. Do not fit or attach anything to the steering wheel or dashboard, this could cause injuries with deployment of the airbags.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats, compatible with the deployment the lateral airbags. For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle, you can contact a PEUGEOT dealer. For more information on accessories, refer to the corresponding section. Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backs (clothing...). This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed. Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain airbag is deployed. If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing the curtain airbags.
5
99
Safety
Carrying children
General points
Although one of PEUGEOT's main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children also depends on you.
For maximum safety, please observe the following recommendations: - in accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less than one and a half metres tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings*, - statistically, the safest seats in your vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats, - a child weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the rearward facing position both in the front and in the rear.
PEUGEOT recommends that children should travel in the outer rear seats of your vehicle: - rearward facing up to the age of 3, - forward facing over the age of 3.
* The regulations on carrying children are specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country.
100
At the front*
Safety
5
Rearward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the seat to the fully back and highest position, with the backrest straightened. The passenger airbag must be deactivated. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were to inflate.
Forward facing
When a forward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to the fully back and highest position with seat backrest straightened and leave the passenger's airbag activated.
Passenger seat
Adjustment - In the fully back position. - Seat cushion in the high position.
* Consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned. Ensure that the child seat is not in contact with a part of the vehicle other than the passenger seat.
101
Safety
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag
Never install a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an active front airbag. This could cause the death of the child or serious injury.
The warning label present on both sides of the passenger's sun visor repeats this advice. In line with current legislation, the following tables contain this warning in all of the languages required.
102
Passenger airbag OFF
Only the passenger's front airbag can be deactivated. F With the ignition off, introduce the key into
the passenger airbag deactivation switch. F Turn it to the "OFF" position. F Remove the key, leaving the switch in this
position. When the ignition is on, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and stays on while the airbag is deactivated.
Safety
AR
BG . .
CS NIKDY neumisujte dtské zádrzné zaízení orientované smrem dozadu na sedadlo chránné AKTIVOVANÝM celním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí nebezpecí SMRTI DÍTTE nebo VÁZNÉHO ZRANNÍ.
DA Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
DE Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung, das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
EL , .
EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur
ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
ET Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
FI ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l'ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR NIKADA ne postavljati djecju sjedalicu leima u smjeru voznje na sjedalo zastieno UKLJUCENIM prednjim ZRACNIM JASTUKOM. To bi moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TESKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT NIEKADA nerenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemons su atgal atgrztu vaiku ant sdyns, kuri saugoma VEIKIANCIOS priekins ORO PAGALVS. Issiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali bti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
LV NEKAD NEuzstdiet uz aizmuguri vrstu brnu sdeklti prieksj pasaziera sdviet, kur ir AKTIVIZTS prieksjais DROSBAS GAISA SPILVENS. Tas var izraist BRNA NVI vai radt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
5
103
Safety
MT Qatt m'ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f'siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista' tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET. PL NIGDY nie instalowa fotelika dziecicego w pozycji "tylem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposaonym w CZOLOW PODUSZK
POWIETRZN w stanie AKTYWNYM. Moe to doprowadzi do MIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodowa u niego POWANE OBRAENIA CIALA. PT NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA. RO Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA. RU , , . SK NIKDY neinstalujte detské zádrzné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM celným AIRBAGOM. Mohlo by dôjs k SMRTENÉMU alebo VÁZNEMU PORANENIU DIEAA. SL NIKOLI ne namescajte otroskega sedeza s hrbtom v smeri voznje, ce je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedezem AKTIVIRANA. Taksna namestitev lahko povzroci SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POSKODBE. SR NIKADA ne koristite decje sediste koje se okree unazad na sedistu zastienim AKTIVNIM VAZDUSNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA. SV Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT. TR KESNLKLE HAVA YASTII AKTF olan ön koltua yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuu yerletirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUUN ÖLMESNE veya ÇOK AIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
104
At the rear
Safety
5
Rearward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the rearward facing child seat does not touch the vehicle's front seat.
Forward facing
When a forward facing child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the forward facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front seat.
Centre rear seat
A child seat with a support leg must never be installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat with backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned. For child seats with a support leg, ensure that this is in firm contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust the front seat of the vehicle.
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the protection of the child in the event of an accident.
105
Safety
Secured by a 3-point seat belt
PEUGEOT offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
L1 "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" Installed in the rearward facing position.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L4 "KLIPPAN Optima" From 22 kg (approximately 6 years), the booster is used on its own.
L5 "RÖMER KIDFIX" Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings. The child is restrained by the seat belt.
106
Safety
Locations for child seats
Child seats secured with the seat belt In accordance with the European regulation, this table indicates the options for the installation of child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved (a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
5
Seat
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 13 kg (groups 0 (b) and 0+) Up to 1 year approx
From 9 to 18 kg
From 15 to 25 kg
(group 1)
(group 2)
From 1 to 3 years approx From 3 to 6 years approx
From 22 to 36 kg (group 3)
From 6 to 10 years approx
Front passenger seat (c), (e)
- with height adjustment - without height adjustment Outer rear seats (d) Centre rear seat (d)
U(R) U* U U (f)
U(R) U* U U (f)
U(R) U* U U
U(R) U* U U
107
Safety
U: seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and universally approved rearward facing and/or forward facing.
U(R): as for U, the vehicle seat must be adjusted to the highest and fully back position.
U*: as for U, straightening the backrest.
(a)universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b)group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
(c)consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
(d)to install a child seat on a rear seat, rearward or forward facing, move the front seat forward, then straighten the backrest to allow enough room for the child seat and the child's legs.
(e)When a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, the passenger's airbag must be deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed. When a forward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, the passenger's airbag must remain activate.
(f)A child seat with support leg must never be installed on this passenger seat.
108
"ISOFIX" mountings
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the latest ISOFIX regulation. The seats, represented below, are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings:
Safety
When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the left hand rear seat, before fitting the seat, first move the centre rear seat belt towards the middle of the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat interfering with the operation of the seat belt.
5
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches which are secured on the two rings A.
Some seats also have an upper strap, known as the Top Tether, which is attached to ring B.
There are three rings for each seat: - two rings A, hidden between the padding of
vehicle seat backrest and cushion, directly below the "ISOFIX" label,
- a ring B behind the seat for fixing the upper strap, referred to as the Top Tether.
The Top Tether is used to secure the upper strap of child seats that have one. This arrangement limits the forward tipping of the child seat in the event of a front impact. This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your vehicle.
To secure the child seat to the top tether: - remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat in this seating position (refit it once the child seat has been removed), - pass the upper strap of the child seat over the top of the seat backrest, centred between the apertures for the head restraint rods, - fix the hook of the upper strap to the ring B, - tighten the upper strap.
109
Safety
Recommended seats
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its Baby-Safe Plus ISOFIX base" (size category: E) Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor. This seat can be secured with a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and attached
to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt.
Baby P2C Midi and its ISOFIX base (size categories: D, C, A, B, B1) Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor.
This child seat can also be used forward facing. This seat can not be secured with a seat belt. We recommend that you use the seat in the rearward facing position up to the age of 3 years.
Follow the instructions for fitting child seats contained in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
110
Safety
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Is installed in the forward facing position. Is attached to the rings A and the upper ring B, referred to as the Top Tether,
using an upper strap. Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying down.
5
This seat can be used on seats not fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle's seat using the three-point seat belt. Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the backrest.
FAIR G 0/1 S and its base RWF B ISOFIX (size category C)
Group 0+ and 1: from birth to 18 kg
Is installed rearward facing. Is installed using an ISOFIX base attached to the rings A.
6 seat body angles. Use the type B ISOFIX base rearward facing (RWF). This child seat can also be used in the forward facing position on seating positions
not fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, the child seat body must be attached to the seat of the vehicle by
the three point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fitting child seats contained in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
111
Safety
Locations for child seats
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 10 kg (group 0)
Up to approx. 6 months
Less than 10 kg (group 0)
Less than 13 kg (group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1) From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat
Infant car seat
rearward facing
rearward facing
forward facing
ISOFIX size category
F
G
C
D
E
C
D
A
B
B1
Front passenger seat Outer rear seats
Not ISOFIX
X
IL-SU*
IL-SU
IL-SU* IL-SU
IUF IL-SU
Centre rear seat
Not ISOFIX
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, Forward facing secured using the upper strap.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either: - rearward facing fitted with an upper strap or a support leg, - forward facing fitted with a support leg, - an infant car seat fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. For advice on securing the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" section. X: seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat for the weight group indicated.
* Vehicle seat in a particular position: move the seats in front of the child forward.
112
Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat on a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.
Safety
Advice
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident. Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt buckle under the child seat, as this could destabilise it. Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harnesses keeping the slack relative to the child's body to a minimum, even for short journeys. When installing a child seat using the seat belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened correctly on the child seat and that it secures the child seat firmly on the seat of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable, move it forwards if necessary. At rear seating positions, always leave sufficient space between the front seat and: - a rearward facing child seat, - the child's feet for a child seat fitted
forward facing. To do this, move the front seat forwards and, if necessary, move its backrest into the upright position.
For optimum installation of the forward facing child seat, ensure that the back of the child seat is as close as possible to the backrest of the vehicle's seat, in contact if possible. You must remove the head restraint before installing a child seat with backrest to a passenger seat. Ensure that the head restraint is stored or attached securely to prevent it from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint when the child seat is removed.
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying children on the front passenger seat is specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country. Deactivate the passenger's front airbag when a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs. PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt guide at shoulder level.
As a safety precaution, do not leave: - a child or children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle, - a child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, - the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle. To prevent accidental opening of the doors and rear windows, use the child lock. Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third. To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
5
113
Safety
Child lock
Manual operation
Electric operation
Mechanical system to prevent opening of a rear door using its interior lever. The control is located on the edge of each rear door.
Electric system, with the control located at the front, for locking the rear doors so that they cannot be opened using their interior controls.
Switching off
F With the ignition on, press this button again. The indicator lamp in the button goes off, accompanied by a message to confirm that the child lock is off. This indicator lamp remains off while the child lock is switched off.
Any other status of the indicator lamp indicates a fault with the electric child lock. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Locking
F Using the ignition key, turn the red control as far as it will go: - to the left on the left-hand rear door, - to the right on the right-hand rear door.
Unlocking
F Using the ignition key, turn the red control as far as it will go: - to the right on the left-hand rear door, - to the left on the right-hand rear door.
114
Switching on
F With the ignition on, press this button. The indicator lamp in the button comes on, accompanied by a message to confirm that the child lock is on. This indicator lamp remains on until the child lock is switched off. It is still possible to open the doors from the outside and operate the rear electric windows from the driver's control panel.
This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of the central locking control. Check the state of the child lock every time you switch on the ignition. Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.
Driving
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting. During acceleration change up early.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
The gear shift indicator invites you to engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it straight away. For vehicles fitted with an electronic or automatic gearbox, this indicator appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO2 emissions and also helps reduce the background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.
Control the use of your electrical equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning. Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open. Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window blinds...). Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as soon as the desired temperature is attained. Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic. Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light does not require their use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices (film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel. Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.
6
115
Driving
Limit the causes of excess consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats. Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference. Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Observe the recommendations on maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in the door aperture, driver's side. Carry out this check in particular: - before a long journey, - at each change of season, - after a long period out of use. Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of operations recommended in the manufacturer's service schedule.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle becomes polluting; go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay to have the emissions of nitrous oxides brought back to the legal level.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles (3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.
116
Driving recommendations
Observe the driving regulations and remain vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your hands on the wheel so that you are ready to react at any time to any eventuality. On a long journey, a break every two hours is strongly recommended. In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate the need to brake and increase the distance from other vehicles.
If you are obliged to drive through water:
Driving on flooded roads
We strongly advise against driving on flooded roads, as this could cause serious damage to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the electrical systems of your vehicle.
- check that the depth of water does not exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that might be generated by other users,
- deactivate the Stop & Start system, - drive as slowly as possible without
stalling. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h), - do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as circumstances allow, make several light brake applications to dry the brake discs and pads. If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Driving
Important!
Never drive with the parking brake applied - Risk of overheating and damage to the braking system! Do not park or run the engine when stationary in areas where inflammable substances and materials (dry grass, dead leaves...) might come into contact with the hot exhaust system - Risk of fire!
6
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised with the engine running. If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake and put the gearbox into neutral or position N or P, depending on the type of gearbox.
117
Driving
Starting
Ignition
Gearbox
Manual
F Place the gear lever in neutral.
Electronic
F Place the gear lever at position N.
Automatic
F Place the gear lever at position P or N.
Starting
F Insert the key into the ignition switch. The system recognises the starting code.
F Unlock the steering column by simultaneously turning the steering wheel and the key.
F Turn the key towards the dashboard to position 3 (Starting).
F When the engine starts, release the key. 118
Steering wheel
In some cases, you may have to apply some force to turn the steering (if the wheels are on lock against a kerb, for example).
Electronic engine immobiliser
The original key contains a coded electronic chip. When the ignition is switched on, starting is only possible if the code is detected and recognised. This protection against theft locks the engine management system a few moments after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine following a break-in.
In the event of a fault, you are informed by illumination of the warning lamp, an audible signal and the display of a message. In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
Advice
Keep away from your vehicle, the label attached to the keys given to you on acquisition of the vehicle. It will help in finding the original code for replacement of the key.
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key or the remote control, which would weigh down on its blade in the ignition switch and could cause a malfunction. It could adversely affect the deployment of the front airbag.
Moving off - Gearbox
Driving
6
Manual
F Start the engine. F Press the clutch pedal fully down.
F Engage first gear. F Release the parking brake. F Progressively release the clutch pedal and
accelerate away.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear lever as this risks damaging the gearbox.
Electronic
F To start the engine, place the lever at position N. F Press firmly on the brake pedal.
F Start the engine. F Select position A. F Release the parking brake. F Progressively release the brake pedal, then
accelerate away.
If you move off in position M, remember to operate the lever or a paddle to engage the gear.
Automatic
F Apply the parking brake. F Select position P or N. F Start the engine. There is an audible signal, accompanied by the display of an alert message, if the gear lever is not in the right position.
F With the engine running, press the brake pedal.
F Release the parking brake. F Select position D. F Progressively release the brake pedal.
The vehicle then moves off.
119
Driving
Switching off
Ignition
Automatic
F Place the gear lever at position P or N. F Immobilise the vehicle. F Apply the parking brake. F Turn the key towards you to position 1
(Stop). F Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Gearbox
Manual
F Place the gear lever in neutral. F Immobilise the vehicle. F Apply the parking brake. F Turn the key towards you to position 1
(Stop). F Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Electronic
F Place the gear lever at position N. F Immobilise the vehicle. F Apply the parking brake. F Turn the key towards you to position 1
(Stop). F Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Coasting
As a safety measure, do not coast (free-wheeling in neutral or with the clutch pedal depressed).
Switching off the engine leads to a loss of braking assistance.
Steering wheel
To facilitate unlocking of the steering wheel, it is recommended that you place the wheels in the straight ahead position before switching off the engine.
120
Key left in the "Ignition on" position
On opening the driver's door, an alert message is displayed, accompanied by an audible signal, to remind you that the key is still in the ignition switch at position 1 (Stop).
If the key has been left in the ignition switch at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will be switched off automatically after one hour. To switch the ignition back on, turn the key to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2 (Ignition on).
Parking brake
Release
F Pull the parking brake lever up gently, press the release button then lower the lever fully.
Application
F Pull the lever up to immobilise your vehicle.
When the vehicle is being driven, if this warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, this indicates that the parking brake is still on or has not been fully released. Remember to fully lower the parking brake lever.
Driving
When parking on a steep slope, direct your wheels against the kerb, apply the parking brake, engage a gear opposite to the direction the vehicle is facing and switch off the ignition. On return to the vehicle, remember that a gear had been engaged before starting the engine.
6
If excessive travel or a loss of effectiveness of this system is noticed, the parking brake must be checked, even between two services. Checks of this safety-related system must be carried by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
121
Driving
Manual gearbox
5-speed
F Move the gear lever fully to the right to engage 5th gear.
Engaging reverse gear
6-speed
F Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5th or 6th gear.
Engaging reverse gear
As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine: - always select neutral, - press the clutch pedal.
The gear shift indicator is displayed in the instrument panel.
F Move the gear lever fully to the right then back.
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idle.
F Raise the collar below the gear lever knob, then push the lever fully to the left and then forward.
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is at idle.
122
Electronic gearbox
5-speed
R. Reverse. N. Neutral. A. Automated mode. M. Manual mode.
Driving
6-speed
R. Reverse. N. Neutral. A. Automated mode. M. Manual mode.
You can change from position A to M and from M to A at any time.
Automated mode
This mode allows gear changing without action by the driver.
Moving off
Lever at position N. F Press the brake pedal firmly.
6
F Start the engine. F Place the lever at A or R. F Release the brake pedal and press the
accelerator pedal progressively.
If the engine does not start: - If N is flashing in the instrument panel,
move the lever to position A then to position N. - If the message "Foot on the brake" is displayed, press firmly on the brake pedal. The A, R or N position of the lever is indicated in the display.
123
Driving
Stopping - Moving off on a slope
Do not uses the accelerator to hold the vehicle, but apply the parking brake.
Manual mode
Steering mounted control paddles
Stopping - Parking
Place the lever at N and apply the parking brake.
Manual gear changing
This mode allows manual sequential gear changing.
F Move the selector lever to M.
F Push the lever forward to change up.
F Press the back of the "+" paddle to change up.
F Press the back of the "-" paddle to change down.
The gear engaged is indicated in the display.
This occasional manual gear changing can be used for overtaking, for example, while remaining in automated mode. F Operate the + or - steering mounted control
paddle. The gearbox engages the gear requested if the engine speed permits. AUTO remains displayed in the instrument panel. After a few moments with no action on the controls, the gearbox returns to automatic management of the gears.
124
F Pull the lever back to change down.
Driving
Creep function
Depending on the engine, the vehicle moves without pressing the accelerator.
Assistance with low-speed manoeuvres
With the engine running at idle, parking brake released and the lever placed at A, M or R, the vehicle moves off when your release the brake pedal. It stops on opening the driver's door. Closing the door, and putting your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal allows movement of the vehicle again.
Advice
Following disconnection of the battery, you have to reinitialise the gearbox. F Switch the ignition on.
AUTO and - appear in the instrument panel.
F Select position N.
F Press the brake pedal firmly.
F Wait around 30 seconds until N or a gear appears in the instrument panel.
F Release the brake pedal.
The gearbox is operational again.
With the ignition on, the illumination of this warning lamp and the flashing of AUTO, accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen, indicate a gearbox fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
6
125
Driving
Automatic gearbox
P. Park. R. Reverse N. Neutral. D. Drive - AUTO driving mode. S. Sport - More dynamic driving. T Snow - Driving on snow covered roads.
Display in the instrument panel
When you select a position with the lever, the corresponding symbol is displayed in the instrument panel.
Foot on the brake warning
Press the brake pedal when this comes on in the instrument panel.
Automated mode
This mode allows gear changes without action by the driver.
Moving off
Parking brake applied. F Start the engine. F Lever at position P or N.
F Press firmly on the brake pedal.
F Release the parking brake. F Place the selector at D or R. F Release the brake pedal and press
the accelerator pedal progressively. The vehicle then moves off.
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicles when the engine is running.
126
Advice
F Select position D for automatic changing of the gears.
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive mode, without action by the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear for the driving style, the relief of the road and the load in the vehicle. For maximum acceleration, without touching the gear lever, press the accelerator pedal fully down (kick down). The gearbox changes down automatically or holds the gear engaged up to maximum engine speed. When braking, the gearbox changes down automatically to provide effective engine braking. When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal quickly, the gearbox does not change up, for your improved safety.
Manual mode
This mode allows manual sequential gear changing. F Move the gear lever to M.
F Push the lever forward to change up.
F Pull the lever back to change down.
Invalid value
This symbol is displayed if a gear is not properly engaged (selector between two positions).
You can change from D to M and M to D at any time.
Driving
When the engine is at idle, if position R, D or M is selected with the brakes released, the vehicle moves on its own without pressing the accelerator. Never leave children unsupervised inside the vehicle when the engine is running. Apply the parking brake and select position P if carrying out a maintenance operation with the engine running.
6
Never select position N when the vehicle is moving. Never select positions P or R unless the vehicle is at a complete stop.
If position N is engaged by mistake when moving, take your foot off the accelerator pedal, then engage position D to accelerate. When the ambient temperature is below -23°C, the engine should be left running at idle for four minutes after starting, to ensure the correct operation and durability of the engine and gearbox.
127
Driving
Sport programme
This special programme completes the automatic operation of the gearbox in certain circumstances.
F Press the "S" button once the engine is running.
The gearbox automatically operates in a way best suited to dynamic driving. S appears in the instrument panel.
Snow programme
This special programme completes the automatic operation and makes it easier to move off and make progress in conditions of poor grip.
F Press the T button, once the engine has started.
The gearbox adapts its operation to driving on slippery surfaces. T appears in the instrument panel.
Return to normal automatic operation
F Press the button again at any time to quit the Sport programme and return to auto-adaptive mode.
Switching off - Parking
Before switching off the engine. F Move the lever to position P or N. F Apply the parking brake. F Immobilise the vehicle.
If the lever is not in position P, a message appears in the screen on opening the driver's door or approximately 45 seconds after switching off the ignition. F Place the lever at position P;
the message disappears. On flooded roads or when crossing a ford, drive at walking pace.
With the ignition on, illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and an alert message in the screen, indicates of gearbox fault.
In this case, the gearbox goes into back-up mode by staying in 3rd gear. You may then notice a pronounced jerk when changing from P to R and from N to R. This jerk does not present any risk to the gearbox. Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h) while keeping to local speed limits. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
You risk damaging the gearbox: F if you press the brake and
accelerator pedals at the same time, F if you force the movement of the lever from position P to another position with a flat battery. To reduce fuel consumption during prolonged stops with the engine running (traffic jams...), position the gear lever at N and apply the parking brake.
128
Gear shift indicator
System which reduces fuel consumption by recommending the most appropriate gear.
Depending on the driving situation and your vehicle's equipment, the system may advise you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can follow this instruction without engaging the intermediate gears. The gear engagement recommendations must not be considered compulsory. This is because the configuration of the road, the traffic density and safety remain determining factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver remains responsible for deciding whether or not to follow the indications given. This function cannot be deactivated.
The information appears in the instrument panel in the form of an arrow. It may be accompanied by a recommended gear.
Driving
The system adapts its gear change recommendation according to the driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and the demands of the driver (power, acceleration, braking, ...). The system never suggests: - engaging first gear, - engaging reverse gear.
6
With an electronic or automatic gearbox, the system is only active in manual mode.
129
Driving
Hill start assist
This system helps you move off on a slope, by holding your vehicle for around 2 seconds, the time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
On an ascending slope with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle is held momentarily when you release the brake pedal. With an electronic gearbox, if you are in position A. With an automatic gearbox, if you are in position D.
On a descending slope, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held momentarily when you release the brake pedal.
The hill start assist system is active when: - your foot on the brake pedal fully
immobilises the vehicle, - when certain conditions of gradient are
met, - the driver's door is closed. The hill start assist system cannot be deactivated.
No one should leave the vehicle while it is being held in the hill start assist phase. If you need to leave the vehicle while the engine is running, apply the parking brake manually then ensure that the parking brake warning lamp is on (not flashing) in the instrument panel.
Operating fault
The fixed illumination of these warning lamps indicates a fault with the system.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
130
Driving
Stop & Start
The system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, ...). The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently. Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.
Operation
STOP mode
The "ECO" lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine goes into standby.
With e-HDi or BlueHDi Diesel and an electronic gearbox: - Speed below 4 mph (6 km/h). - Gear lever in position N Or - Brake pedal pressed.
With BlueHDi Diesel and a manual gearbox: - As soon as the vehicle stops. - Gear lever in neutral and clutch pedal
released.
With PureTech petrol and a manual, electronic or automatic gearbox: - As soon as the vehicle stops. - Gear lever in neutral and clutch pedal
released (manual gearbox). - Brake pedal pressed or gear lever in
position N (electronic or automatic gearbox).
Special cases
STOP mode is not invoked when: - the driver's door is open, - the driver's seat belt is not fastened, - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h) since the last engine start using the key, - the engine is needed to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, - demisting is selected, - some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed to assure control of a system.
The "ECO" lamp flashes for a few seconds then goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
6
131
Driving
Advice
A time counter calculates the sum of the periods in STOP mode during a journey. It rests itself to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.
For your comfort, during parking manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available for a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear. The Stop & Start system does not affect the functionality of the vehicle, such as for example, braking, ...
START mode
The "ECO" lamp goes off and the engine restarts.
With a manual gearbox: - Clutch pedal depressed.
With an electronic / automatic gearbox: - Gear lever in position A / D or M. - Brake pedal released.
or - Gear lever in position N. - Brake pedal released. - Then gear lever in position A / D or M.
With a manual gearbox in STOP mode, if you engage a gear without fully depressing the clutch pedal, a message is displayed asking you to fully depress the clutch pedal so that the engine can restart.
or - Reverse gear engaged.
Special cases
As a safety measure and for your comfort, START mode is invoked automatically when: - you open the driver's door, - you unfasten the driver's seat belt, - some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed for control of a system.
The "ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.
132
Driving
Manual deactivation
In some circumstances, such as maintaining a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, it may be useful to deactivate Stop & Start. The system can be deactivated at any time, once the ignition is on.
Operating fault
6
Opening the bonnet Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid the risk of injury related to an automatic change to START mode.
Driving on flooded roads Before driving through a flooded road, it is strongly recommended that you deactivate the Stop & Start system. For more advice on driving, particularly on flooded roads, refer to the corresponding section.
This control switches off the Stop & Start system. - Press. - The indicator lamp in the control remains
on. - A message is displayed. If the vehicle is stationary in Stop mode, the engine immediately restarts.
Manual reactivation
- Press. - The indicator lamp in the control goes off. - A confirmation message is displayed.
If the engine is in STOP mode, it then restarts. The Stop & Start system is reactivated automatically every time the ignition is switched on.
In the event of a fault with the system, the "ECO OFF" switch warning lamp flashes then comes on continuously. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the vehicle may stall. All of the warning lamps come on. It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and start the engine again using the key.
The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V battery of special specification and technology. All work on this type of battery must be done by a PEUGEOT or a qualified workshop. For more information on the 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section.
133
Driving
Speed limiter "LIMIT"
Steering mounted controls
1. Speed limiter mode selection / off. 2. Increase the registered speed setting. 3. Decrease the registered speed setting. 4. Speed limiter On / Pause.
134
"This is the speed that the driver does not want to exceed". The speed setting is selected with the engine running, stationary or when driving. The minimum speed setting possible is 20 mph (30 km/h). The vehicle responds to the accelerator until resistance is felt in the pedal, which signifies that the vehicle has reached the limiter speed setting. However, the limit speed can be exceeded by pressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance; simply release the accelerator pedal to return to a speed below the limiter setting. Setting and operation of the system can be done stationary with the engine running or when driving.
Selection
Registering a limit speed
This can be done without switching the limiter on, but the engine must be running. To register a speed higher than the previous setting.
- Press the SET + button.
A short press increases the setting in steps of 1 mph (km/h). Pressing and holding increases the setting in steps of 5 mph (km/h). To register a speed lower than the previous setting.
- Press the SET - button.
F Place the thumbwheel at the "LIMIT" position: the speed limiter mode is selected but is not switched on (PAUSE).
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in order to set the speed.
A short press decreases the setting by 1 mph (km/h). Pressing and holding decreases the setting in steps of 5 mph (km/h).
On / Pause
Flashing of the speed setting Operating fault
Driving
6
A first press on this button switches the speed limiter on, a second press pauses it (OFF).
Exceeding the registered limit speed
Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the registered speed will not have any effect, unless you press the pedal firmly past the point of resistance. The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the registered speed setting flashes, accompanied by an audible signal. To return to normal operation of the speed limiter, reduce your speed to below the registered speed setting.
It flashes: - after forcing the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance, - when the limiter cannot prevent the speed
of the vehicle increasing, because of the profile of the road or when going down a steep hill, - under sharp acceleration.
Switching off the function
F Place the thumbwheel at the 0 position or switch off the ignition to stop the system.
The last speed registered stays in memory.
The registered speed is erased, then replaced by three dashes. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
In no circumstances can the speed limiter replace the need to observe speed limits or the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. Be aware of the effect of the profile of the road and sharp acceleration, maintaining control of the vehicle at all times. To avoid any risk of interference below the pedals: - ensure that the mat and its
fixings on the floor are positioned correctly, - do not fit one mat on top of another.
135
Driving
Cruise control "CRUISE"
Steering mounted controls
Selection
"This is the speed the driver wishes to maintain". This driving assistance system for use when the traffic is flowing, allows a speed set by the driver to be maintained, except on a steep gradient.
With a manual gearbox To be registered or activated, the speed of the vehicle must be above 25 mph (40 km/h) with 4th gear or higher engaged.
F Place the thumbwheel at the "CRUISE" position: the cruise control mode is selected but is not switched on (PAUSE).
1. Cruise control mode selection / off. 2. Increase the registered speed setting. 3. Decrease the registered speed setting. 4. Cruise control Off / Resume.
With an electronic gearbox To be registered or activated, the speed of the vehicle must be above 25 mph (40 km/h) with 2nd gear or higher engaged in manual mode, or position A selected.
With an automatic gearbox To be registered or activated, the speed of the vehicle must be above 25 mph (40 km/h) with 2nd gear or higher engaged in manual mode, or position D selected.
136
Driving
Registering a cruise speed setting
- Bring the vehicle up to the desired speed by pressing the accelerator.
Temporarily exceeding the speed
It is possible to accelerate and temporarily drive at a speed higher than the registered speed setting.
The cruise speed setting value flashes. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the registered speed setting.
Pause (OFF)
- Press the SET - or SET + button
The speed setting is registered/activated and the vehicle will maintain this speed.
- Press this button or the brake or clutch pedal.
Resume
6
- After the cruise control has been paused, press this button.
The vehicle returns to the last registered speed. Or, you can also start the procedure for "Registering a cruise speed setting".
Changing the registered speed setting
To register a speed higher than the previous setting, there are two possibilities.
137
Driving
Switching off the function
- Place the thumbwheel at the "0" position: cruise control mode is deselected. The display returns to the total mileage recorder.
After switching off the ignition, all registered speed settings are lost.
Without using the accelerator
- Press the SET + button. A short press increases the speed setting by 1 mph (km/h). Pressing and holding increases the setting in steps of 5 mph (km/h).
Using the accelerator
- Accelerate beyond the registered speed to the new desired speed.
- Press the SET + or SET - button.
Operating fault
The registered speed setting is erased, then replaced by three dashes. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
To register a speed lower than the previous setting:
- Press the SET - button.
A short press decreases the speed setting by 1 mph (km/h). Pressing and holding decreases the setting in steps of 5 mph (km/h). 138
Be vigilant when modifying the cruise control setting by pressing and holding, as the speed of your vehicle may increase or decrease quickly. Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads or in heavy traffic. On a steep descent, the cruise control will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the registered speed. The cruise control system cannot in any circumstances replace the need to observe speed limits or the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is positioned
and secured to the floor correctly, - never fit one mat on top of another.
Speed settings
The speed values applied by the speed limiter "LIMIT" and the cruise control "CRUISE" can be saved (up to 5 different speed settings).
Driving
6
With the touch screen
F Go to the main menu by pressing the "MENU" button.
F Select the "Driving" menu.
F Select the secondary page.
F Select "Speed settings".
F Select the speed to be modified. F Press on "Modify".
F Enter the new value. F Press on confirm. F Confirm to save the modifications and quit
the menu.
As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out these operations when stationary.
Advice
Use this button to select all speeds.
Use this button to deselect all speeds. This button restores the factory settings.
139
Driving
At the steering mounted control
To select a saved speed: F press and hold button "+" or "-"; the system
stops at the closest saved speed, F press and hold button "+" or "-" again to
select another saved speed. A reminder of the speed and the state of the system (on / off) is displayed in the instrument panel.
140
Active City Brake
Driving
6
A preventive driving assistance system that, using a sensor located at the top of the windscreen, automatically applies the vehicle's brakes if driving behind a vehicle that is slowing down rapidly, stopping or is stationary. The objective is to avoid a collision or reduce the speed of impact. This system is designed to improve driving safety. It remains the driver's responsibility to continuously monitor the state of the traffic and to assess the distances and relative speeds of other vehicles.
The Active City Brake system can in no circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
When your vehicle is too close to or approaches the vehicle ahead too quickly, the system automatically applies the brakes to avoid a collision.
If operation is triggered: - Display of a message. - Illumination of the brake lamps. The automatic braking is triggered as a last resort, if the driver fails to apply the brakes sufficiently firmly or at all, or to take avoiding action.
The laser beam is invisible. Never look at the laser sensor through an optical instrument (magnifying glass, microscope...): risk of eye injury.
Conditions for operation: - Vehicles driving in the same lane. - Not in too sharp a bend. - Speed of your vehicle between 3 and
18 mph (5 and 30 km/h). - Braking assistance systems (ABS, EBFD,
EBA) in working order. - Trajectory control systems (ASR, DSC) in
working order and not deactivated. - Operation of Active City Brake not
triggered in the previous 10 seconds.
141
Driving
Touch screen
The automatic braking triggered: - can be even more effective if the driver
presses the brake pedal more firmly, - may stop the vehicle, holding the brakes on
for 1.5 seconds when stationary to allow the driver time to take back control of the vehicle, - may cause the engine to stall, - may give rise to a pumping noise, due to the pressurisation of the braking system.
Activation Press "MENU" to display the "MAIN MENU".
Select "Driving".
Select "Secondary page".
The collision can be automatically avoided if the speed difference between your vehicle and the one ahead is not more than 9 mph (15 km/h). Above this threshold, the system will do what is possible to avoid or reduce the seriousness of the accident by lowering the speed of impact.
Select "Vehicle settings".
Select the "Driving assistance" tab. Check the "Automatic emergency braking activated" box.
Confirm.
Deactivation Check the "Automatic emergency braking deactivated" box. The last selection remains in memory when the ignition is switched off. If the automatic emergency braking function is deactivated, following each start a temporary message will be displayed to signal this, once a speed threshold (6 mph - 10 km/h) is exceeded.
To deactivate: - Following an impact to the windscreen
close to the sensor. - When towing a trailer. - When the vehicle is being towed. - When the vehicle is about to cross a toll
payment barrier. - When the vehicle is going through an
automatic car wash.
142
Driving
Limits of operation
Not detected are: - Pedestrians, animals, motorcyclists,
cyclists. - Fixed and non-reflective materials and
objects (cardboard box, wall, ...). - Vehicles not travelling in the same
direction. The system is not triggered or is interrupted if the driver: - presses the accelerator pedal firmly, - turns the wheel sharply (avoiding
manoeuvre).
Operating faults
Clean or clear any dirt, mist or objects (stickers, leaves, ...) from the top of the windscreen that could obstruct the laser's field of vision. Misting of the windscreen or accumulations of snow on the bonnet could interfere with the operation of the laser. A message appears if the laser is obstructed. Use windscreen demisting and regularly clean the area of the windscreen in front of the sensor. Be particularly vigilant when driving in poor weather (very heavy rain, hail, fog, snow...). This is because braking distances increase while the laser's calculation parameters remain the same.
In the following cases, you should have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. - The message "Automatic braking system
fault" accompanied by an audible signal indicating that a fault has been detected. - Following an impact, the system is automatically put out of service, it no longer works. The system detects the deployment of airbags.
Do not attempt to remove, adjust or test the sensor. Only a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop is able to work on the system.
6
143
Driving
Parking sensors
Engage reverse gear
Display in the screen
The audible (front and rear) and visual (rear) parking sensor system consists of proximity sensors, installed in the rear bumper. The sensors detect any obstacle which enters its field of operation (person, vehicle, tree, fence, ...) behind the vehicle during the manoeuvre. Certain objects detected at the beginning of the manoeuvre will no longer be detected at the end of the manoeuvre due to the blind spots between and below the sensors. Examples: stake, roadworks cone or pavement post.
An audible signal confirms the activation of the system by engaging reverse gear. The proximity information is indicated by an audible signal which becomes more rapid as the vehicle approaches the obstacle. When the distance between the rear of the vehicle and the obstacle is less than approximately 30 centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous.
This completes the audible signal by the display of bars in the multifunction screen, which become closer and closer as the vehicle approaches the obstacle. When very close to the obstacle, the "Danger" symbol is displayed in the screen.
144
Driving
Stopping the assistance
Change to neutral.
Switching off the assistance
Press; the indicator lamp comes on. The state of the system is stored when the vehicle is switched off.
Resuming assistance
Press again; the indicator lamp goes off.
If this warning lamp comes on when reverse gear is engaged, accompanied by a message and/or an audible signal, a fault has been detected.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop.
Advice
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow. The system will be deactivated automatically if a trailer is being towed or if a bicycle carrier is fitted (vehicle fitted with a towbar or bicycle carrier recommended by PEUGEOT).
The parking sensor system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
6
145
Driving
Reversing camera
The reversing camera is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged. The image is displayed in the touch screen.
The reversing camera function may be completed with parking sensors.
146
The superimposed representation of guide lines helps with the manoeuvre. They are represented by lines marked "on the ground" and do not allow the position of the vehicle to be determined relative to tall obstacles (for example: other vehicles, ...). Some deformation of the image is normal.
The blue lines represent the general direction of the vehicle (the difference corresponds to the width of your vehicle without the mirrors). The red lines represent a distance of about 30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear bumper. The green lines represent distances of about 1 and 2 metres beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear bumper.
The reversing camera cannot in any circumstances be a substitute for vigilance on the part of the driver.
High pressure jet washing When washing your vehicle, do not direct the lance within 30 cm of the camera lens.
Opening the tailgate causes the display to disappear.
Clean the reversing camera regularly using a soft, dry cloth.
Park Assist
The system detects a parking space and then provides assistance with the parallel parking manoeuvres. It controls the steering and provides visual and audible information to the driver. The driver manages the accelerator, brakes, gears and the clutch in the case of a manual gearbox.
The Park Assist system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The driver must remain in control of their vehicle ensuring that the space remains clear during the manoeuvre. In some circumstances, the sensors may not detect small obstacles located in their blind spots.
Driving
During a manoeuvre the steering wheel turns quickly: do not hold the steering wheel, do not place your hand between the spokes of the steering wheel and take care with loose and bulky clothing, scarves, handbags... There is a risk of injury.
The selection of the type of manoeuvre (entering or exiting a parallel parking space) prevents a change to STOP mode of Stop & Start. In STOP mode, this selection restarts the engine.
6
For entry into a parking space (parallel parking) the system does not detect spaces which are clearly much smaller or larger than the size of the vehicle. This "parking assistance" system is activated automatically during manoeuvres; it is therefore possible that a symbol comes on in the screen, accompanied by an audible signal, without affecting the manoeuvre.
The driver can take back control of the steering at any time by grasping the wheel.
Changing tyre sizes (out-size tyres, winter tyres, ...) can interfere with the correct operation of the parking assistance system.
The system provides assistance in entering and exiting a parking space when parallel parking.
147
Driving
Entering a parallel parking space
F When you have identified a free space, reduce the speed of the vehicle to a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h).
F Position your vehicle before this space.
F Operate the direction indicator on the parking side.
F Move your vehicle forward until a new message is displayed.
To activate the Park Assist system: F Press this control to activate the system. The indicator lamp in the control remains off.
A message is displayed in the screen. F Select the enter parking space manoeuvre.
The indicator lamp in the control comes on.
F Move forwards alongside the parking space at a speed below 12 mph (20 km/h) to measure it, keeping at a distance of between 0.5 and 1.5 metres from the row of parked vehicles.
Once measurement is complete, if the space is large enough a message indicates that parking is possible.
F Select reverse and release the steering wheel.
148
Exit from a parallel parking space
F When you want to exit from a parallel parking space, start the engine.
Driving
6
The assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), continue the manoeuvres following the information given by the "parking assistance" system, until the end of manoeuvre message is displayed. The indicator lamp in the control goes off, accompanied by a audible signal.
The driver takes back control of the vehicle's steering.
With the vehicle stationary, to activate the Park Assist system: F Press this control. The indicator lamp in the control remains off.
A message is displayed in the screen.
F Select the exit parking space manoeuvre. The indicator lamp in the control comes on.
F Operate the direction indicator on the exit from parking side. The direction indicator warning lamp flashes in the instrument panel throughout the manoeuvre, whatever the position of the stalk.
F Select a forward or reverse gear then release the steering wheel.
The assisted exit from parking manoeuvre is in progress. Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), continue the manoeuvres following the information given by the "parking assistance" system, until the end of manoeuvre message is displayed. The manoeuvre is complete once the front wheels of the vehicle are out of the parking space. The indicator lamp in the control goes off, accompanied by a audible signal.
The driver takes back control of the vehicle's steering.
149
Driving
Deactivation
The system is deactivated automatically: - on switching off the ignition, - if the engine stalls, - if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes
of selection of the type of manoeuvre, - after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during
a manoeuvre, - if the road wheel anti-spin regulation (ASR)
is triggered, - if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the
stated limit, - when the driver interrupts movement of the
steering wheel, - if the driver presses the Park Assist
control, - if correct positioning of the vehicle is not
possible (too many manoeuvres needed to insert or extract the vehicle), - if the driver's door is open, - if one of the front wheels encounters an obstacle.
If the system is deactivated during a manoeuvre, the driver should reactivate it manually to repeat the measurement.
A message is displayed in the screen.
The driver then takes back control of the vehicle's steering.
Switching off
The system is switched off automatically: - when towing a trailer, - if the driver's door is opened, - if the speed of the vehicle is above 42 mph
(70 km/h). To switch the system off for a prolonged period, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
This warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel and/or a message appears in the screen, accompanied by an audible signal (short beep).
The indicator lamp in the control flashes for a few seconds. If the problem occurs while using the system, the indicator lamp goes off.
These warning lamps indicate a fault with the power steering.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the space is too great, the system may not be able to measure the space. Anything projecting beyond the envelope of the vehicle (long or wide load) is not taken into account by the Park Assist system during a manoeuvre.
In bad weather and in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered by road dirt, ice or snow. In the event of a fault, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
150
Under-inflation detection
System which automatically checks the pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system monitors the pressures in the four tyres, once the vehicle is moving. It compares the information given by the four wheel speed sensors with reference values, which must be reinitialised every time the tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. The system triggers an alert as soon as it detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or more tyres.
The under-inflation detection system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. This system does not avoid the need to check the tyre pressures (including the spare wheel) every month as well as before a long journey. Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs road holding, extends braking distances and causes premature tyre wear, particularly under arduous condition (high loading, high speed, long journey).
Driving with under-inflated tyres increases fuel consumption.
Driving
6
The inflation pressures defined for your vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure label. See the "Identification markings" section. Tyre pressures should be checked when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at moderate speeds). Otherwise (when hot), add 0.3 bar to the pressures shown on the label.
151
Driving
Under-inflation alert
This is given by fixed illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and, depending on equipment, the display of a message.
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive steering movements and sudden braking.
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
The loss of pressure detected does not always cause visible bulging of the tyre. Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual check.
F In the event of a puncture, use the temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel (depending on equipment),
or F if you have a compressor, such as the one
in the temporary puncture repair kit, check the pressures of the four tyres when cold, or F if it is not possible to make this check immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed.
The alert is maintained until the system is reinitialised.
The under-inflation alert can only be relied on if the system has been reinitialised with all four tyres inflated to the correct pressures.
Snow chains
The system does not have to be reinitialised after fitting or removing snow chains.
152
Driving
Reinitialisation
It is necessary to reinitialise the system every time one or more tyre pressures are adjusted, and after changing one or more wheels.
Touch screen
Screen A
6
Before reinitialising the system, ensure that the pressures of the four tyres are correct for the use of the vehicle and in line with the recommendations on the tyre pressure label. The under-inflation alert can only be relied on if the reinitialisation of the system has been done with the pressures in the four tyres correctly adjusted. The under-inflation detection system does not give a warning if a pressure is incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
Before doing anything to the system, the pressures of the four tyres must be checked and the system reinitialised.
Reinitialisation of the system is done with the ignition on and the vehicle stationary.
From the "Driving assistance" menu of the touch screen:
F Press "Under-inflation initialisation".
F Confirm the instruction by pressing "Yes", an audible signal and a message confirm the reinitialisation.
The new pressure settings registered are considered to be reference values by the system.
F With the ignition on and the vehicle stationary, press this button for about 3 seconds then release it, an audible signal confirms the reinitialisation.
Operating fault
The flashing and then fixed illumination of the under-inflation warning lamp accompanied by illumination of the Service warning lamp indicates a fault with the system. In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the tyres is no longer assured. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
153
Practical information
Fuel tank
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres.
Low fuel level
When the low fuel level is reached this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel. There remains approximately 5 litres of fuel in the tank. When the warning lamp flashes, there is very little fuel left. You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer to the "Running out of fuel - Diesel" section.
The key cannot be removed from the lock until the cap is refitted. Removing the filler cap may cause an inrush of air. This vacuum is perfectly normal and results from the sealing of the system.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the system in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.
Refuelling
1. Open the filler flap. 2. Remove the filler cap. 3. Hook the filler cap.
A self-adhesive label on the inner face of the filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use depending on your engine. Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to be registered by the fuel gauge.
To fill the tank safely: F the engine must be switched off, F open the fuel filler flap 1, F insert the key in the cap 2, then turn it to
the left, F remove the cap and hook it onto the clip
located on the inside of the flap 3, F fill the tank, but do not continue after the
3rd cut-off of the pump; this could cause malfunctions.
154
Practical information
When you have filled the tank: F put the cap back in place, F turn the key to the right, then remove it
from the cap, F close the flap.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for the engine of your vehicle, you must have the fuel tank drained and filled with the correct fuel before starting the engine.
Diesel
Particle filter
The start of saturation of the particle filter is indicated by the fixed illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by a warning message in the screen (if a display screen is fitted).
As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off. If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a low additive level.
Diesel additive
A low additive level is indicated by illumination of the service warning lamp, accompanied by an audible warning and a message in the screen (if a display screen is fitted).
Topping-up This additive must be topped up by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
7
Fuel supply cut-off
Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an impact.
On a new vehicle, the first particle filter regeneration operations may be accompanied by a "burnt" smell, which is normal. Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the emission of water vapour at the exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.
155
Practical information
Misfuel prevention
On vehicles with Diesel engines Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel. Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
Operation
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact with the flap. The system remains closed and prevents filling. Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type filler nozzle.
It remains possible to use a fuel can to fill the tank. In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in direct contact with the flap of the misfuel prevention device and pour slowly.
156
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different in other countries, the presence of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible. Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with misfuel protection, so before travelling abroad, we recommend that you check with the PEUGEOT dealer network, whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the country in which you intend to travel.
Practical information
Fuel used for petrol engines
The petrol engines are compatible with E10 bio-petrol (containing 10 % ethanol), conforming to European standards EN 228 and EN 15376. E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must comply with European standard EN 15293.
Fuel used for Diesel engines
The Diesel engines are compatible with biofuels available at the pumps which meet current and future European standards: - Diesel fuel that meets standard EN 590
mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN 14214, - Diesel fuel that meets standard EN 16734 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN 14214 (possibly containing up to 10 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester), - Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets standard EN 15940 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN 14214 (possibly containing up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
The use of B20 or B30 fuel meeting standard EN 16709 is possible in your Diesel engines. However, this use, even occasional, requires strict application of the special servicing conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The use of any other type of (bio)fuel (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system). Only the use of Diesel fuel additives that meet the standard B715000 is authorised.
7
157
Practical information
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Original tyre size
185/65 R15 195/55 R16 205/45 R17
Maximum link size.
9 mm
7 mm
For more information on snow chains, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Advice on installation
F If you have to fit the chains during a journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and position any wheel chocks to prevent movement of your vehicle.
F Fit the chains following the instructions provided by the manufacturer.
F Move off gently and drive for a few moments, without exceeding 30 mph (50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow chains are correctly tightened.
The snow chains must be fitted only to the front wheels. They must never be fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels.
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads that have been cleared of snow, to avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, check that no part of the chain or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.
Take account of the legislation in force in your country on the use of snow chains and the maximum running speed authorised.
It is strongly recommended that before you leave, you practise fitting the snow chains on a level and dry surface.
158
Towing a trailer
Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and the driver must take particular care. For more advice on driving when towing, refer to the corresponding section.
Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.
We recommend the use of genuine PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses that have been tested and approved from the design stage of your vehicle, and that the fitting of the towbar is entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. If the towbar is not fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer, it must still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's instructions.
For more information on weights (and the towed loads which apply to your vehicle) refer to the corresponding section.
You must observe the maximum trailer weight, indicated on the registration certificate or in the technical specification for your vehicle.
Practical information
7
159
Practical information
When towing
Distribution of loads
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the temperature of the coolant. As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of engine braking is recommended.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance. Above 1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of altitude.
For more information on weights (and the towed loads which apply to your vehicle) refer to the corresponding section.
Side wind
F Take into account the increased sensitivity to side wind.
F To lower the engine speed, reduce your speed.
The maximum towed load on a long incline depends on the gradient and the ambient temperature. In all cases, keep a check on the coolant temperature.
F If the warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as possible.
Tyres
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures.
Lighting
F Check the electrical lighting and signalling on the trailer and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle.
For more information on adjusting the headlamp beam height, refer to the corresponding section.
The rear parking sensors will be deactivated automatically if a genuine PEUGEOT towbar is used.
160
Energy load
Load reduction mode
System which manages the use of certain functions according to the level of charge remaining in the battery. When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as the air conditioning, the heated rear screen... The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit.
Practical information
Economy mode
System which manages the period of use of certain functions to maintain an adequate state of charge of the battery. After switching off the engine and for a maximum cumulative period of around 30 minutes, you can continue to use functions such as the audio and telematic system, the wipers, dipped beam, courtesy lamps, ...
Entry into the mode
Once this time has elapsed, a message advising the entry into energy economy mode appears in the screen and the active functions on put on standby. If a telephone call is in progress at this time, the connection via the audio system's handsfree function will be maintained for around 10 minutes.
7
Coming out of the mode
These functions will be automatically restored the next time the vehicle is used. To restore the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and allow it run for at least 5 minutes.
The engine will not start if the battery is discharged.
161
Practical information
Accessories
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the PEUGEOT dealer network. These accessories and parts are all suitable for your vehicle and benefit from PEUGEOT's recommendation and warranty.
The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by PEUGEOT may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system and excessive electrical consumption. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer for information on the range of recommended equipment and accessories.
"Comfort":
door deflectors, side blinds and rear blind, cigarette lighter, boot dividers, coat hanger fixed to head restraint, front centre armrest, under shelf storage, front and rear parking sensors...
"Transport solutions":
boot liner with dividers, luggage net, roof bars, bicycle carrier on roof bars, ski carrier, roof box...
Conversion kits
You can obtain an "Enterprise" kit to convert a trade vehicle to a private car and vice-versa.
"Styling":
aluminium gear lever knob, spoiler, styling strips, alloy wheels, trims, chromed mirror shells, stickers, interior and exterior mirror shells, parking brake lever grips, alloy wheel caps...
"Security":
anti-theft alarm, window engraving, wheel security bolts, child seats and booster cushions, breathalyzer, first aid kit, warning triangle, high visibility jacket, stolen vehicle tracking system, temporary puncture repair kit, snow chains, non-slip covers, front foglamps kit...
"Protection":
mats, seat covers compatible with lateral airbags, mud flaps, side protection rubbing strips, bumper protection rubbing strips, aluminium or PVC door aperture finishers... To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is positioned and
secured correctly, - never fit one mat on top of another.
Tow bar, which must be fitted by PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
162
"Multimedia":
audio systems, portable satellite navigation systems, semi-integral support for portable satellite navigation system, hands-free kit, speakers, DVD player (depending on version), connection kit for MP3 player...
Installation of radio communication transmitters
Before installing any after-market radio communication transmitter, you can contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the specification of transmitters which can be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial position, specific installation requirements), in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC).
By visiting a PEUGEOT dealer, you can also obtain products for cleaning and maintenance (exterior and interior) - including ecological products in the "TECHNATURE*" range, topping up products (screenwash...), touch-up pens and paint aerosols for the exact colour of your vehicle, refills (cartridge for the temporary puncture repair kit...), ...
Practical information
Depending on the legislation in force in the country, certain safety equipment may be compulsory: high visibility safety vests, warning triangles, breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle.
7
* The "TECHNATURE" range comprises products for the care and maintenance of your vehicle, recommended and approved by PEUGEOT.
163
Practical information
Changing a wiper blade
Removing a wiper blade
F Lift the corresponding wiper arm away from the windscreen.
F Unclip and remove the wiper blade.
This position allows the wiper blades to be moved away from the windscreen. It is used for cleaning or replacement of the blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to release the wiper blades from the windscreen.
To move the wiper blades to the vertical position: F Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute
after switching off the ignition places the wiper blades vertically on the screen.
To return them to the park position: F Switch on the ignition and operate the
wiper stalk.
Fitting the new wiper blade
F Position and clip the new wiper blade to the arm.
F Carefully lower the wiper arm.
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat wiper blades, it is advisable to: - handle them with care, - clean them regularly using soapy
water, - avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen, - replace them at the first signs of
wear.
164
Fitting roof bars
When fitting transverse roof bars, take care to position them correctly on the retaining pins located in the door apertures.
Use accessories recommended by PEUGEOT observing the manufacturer's recommendations and fitting instructions so as to avoid the risk of damaging the body (deformation, scratches, ...).
Do not exceed the maximum authorised load, shown in the instructions for the roof bars.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profile of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings on the roof. Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting objects which are longer than the vehicle.
Practical information
7
165
RECOMMENDS
PEUGEOT & TOTAL,
A PARTNERSHIP TO DELIVER
BETTER PERFORMANCE!
2015 was marked by PEUGEOT's return to Rally-Raid, one of the most difficult motorsport disciplines in the world. To obtain the best performance in these trials, PEUGEOT Sport chose TOTAL QUARTZ for the PEUGEOT 2008 DKR, a lubricant of high technology which protects the engine in the most severe conditions.
TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects of time. TOTAL QUARTZ Ineo First is a high performance lubricant, the result of work done together by PEUGEOT and TOTAL R&D. Specially formulated for the engines in PEUGEOT vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces CO2 emissions and keeps your engine clean.
Bonnet
Before doing anything under the bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from an automatic change to START mode.
Practical information
7
Opening
A. Interior release lever. B. Exterior safety catch. C. Bonnet stay.
F Lift the safety catch B and raise the bonnet.
F Unclip the stay C from its housing and place it in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.
F Open the left hand front door. F Pull the release lever A, located at the
bottom of the door aperture, towards you.
The location of the interior release lever prevents opening of the bonnet when the left hand front door is closed.
Do not open the bonnet under very windy conditions. When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch and the stay with care (risk of burns).
Closing
F Take the stay C out of its support slot. F Clip the stay back into its housing.
Because of the presence of electrical equipment under the bonnet, it is recommended that exposure to water (rain, washing, ...) be limited.
F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end of its travel.
F Pull the bonnet to check that it has latched correctly.
167
Practical information
Petrol
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids and for replacing certain components.
1. Screenwash reservoir. 2. Coolant header tank. 3. Brake fluid reservoir. 4. Battery / Fuses. 5. Fusebox. 6. Air filter. 7. Engine oil dipstick. 8. Engine oil filler cap.
Checking levels
Check the levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated. If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).
168
Diesel
The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids, for replacing certain components and for priming the fuel system.
1. Screenwash reservoir. 2. Coolant header tank. 3. Brake fluid reservoir. 4. Battery / Fuses. 5. Fusebox. 6. Air filter. 7. Engine oil dipstick. 8. Engine oil filler cap. 9. Priming pump (depending on engine). The AdBlue® additive tank filler is located in the boot below the spare wheel.
Checking levels
Check the levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated. If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).
Practical information
7
169
Practical information
Checking levels
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated. If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Brake fluid
Level
The brake fluid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check the brake pad wear.
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).
Changing the fluid
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the interval for this operation.
Fluid specification
The brake fluid must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Oil level
The check is carried out either when the ignition is switched on using the oil level indicator in the instrument panel (depending on version), or using the dipstick. It will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.
It is normal to top up the oil level between two services (or oil changes). PEUGEOT recommends that you check the level, and top up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 km).
Engine oil change
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the interval for this operation. In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emission control system, never use additives in the engine oil.
Oil specification
The oil must be the correct grade for your engine and conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.
170
Practical information
Oil level
Dipstick
For more information on the underbonnet and the engine oil dipstick, refer to the corresponding section. There are 2 marks on the dipstick:
- A = max; never exceed this level,
- B = min; top up the level via the oil filler cap, using the grade of oil suited to your engine.
Checking
F Open the bonnet and secure it with the stay.
F Pull the dipstick out and wipe it with a clean cloth.
F Return the dipstick to its tube and then pull it out again to check the level against the mark.
F Return the dipstick to its tube.
Low oil level
F Identify the engine oil filler cap. F Open the filler cap. F Add engine oil with exceeding mark A. F Fit the filler cap.
Advice
Take care when working under the bonnet, as some parts of the engine can be very hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan can start at any time (even with the ignition switched off). If a level is found to be very low, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. A check of the engine oil level is only valid if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for at least 30 minutes. Oil grade: the oil used must meet the specification given in the manufacturer's servicing and warranty booklet.
7
171
Practical information
Electronic oil level indicator
The check is done for a few seconds after switching on the ignition, with a message in the display or screen (depending on version). It is only valid if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for at least 30 minutes.
It is normal to top-up the engine oil level between services (or oil changes). PEUGEOT recommends that you check the oil level and top-up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 km).
Level incorrect
This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL" or by the display of a dedicated message in the instrument panel. If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid damage to the engine.
Used products
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or fluids with the skin. Most of these fluids are harmful to health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground. Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop (France) or to an authorised waste disposal site.
Level correct
172
Fault
This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL_ _" or by the display of a dedicated message in the instrument panel. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the manufacturer's service schedule and according to your engine. Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary to have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services. Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.
Brake disc wear
Only use products recommended by PEUGEOT or products of equivalent quality and specification. In order to optimise the operation of units as important as those in the braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers very specific products. After washing the vehicle, dampness, or in wintry conditions, ice can form on the brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may be reduced. Make light brake applications to dry and defrost the brakes.
For information on checking brake disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Practical information
Oil filter
Replace the oil filter each time the engine oil is changed. Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the replacement interval for this component.
7
Air filter
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the replacement intervals for this component. Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace it twice as often if necessary. A dirty air filter may restrict engine performance.
173
Practical information
BlueHDi and AdBlue® additive
SCR technology
The objective of BlueHDi is to reduce by up to 90% the emissions of NOx (nitrous oxides) in the air, using a system that converts NOx into water vapour and nitrogen in a dedicated catalytic converter: SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction). This objective meets the "Euro 6" emissions standard adopted by the European Union aimed at limiting the emissions of pollutants from internal combustion engines. The SCR technology used on BlueHDi engines involves the injection of AdBlue® fluid into the exhaust system.
AdBlue® is the brand name of the solution needed for operation of the SCR system.
BlueHDi vehicles have a specific AdBlue® additive tank with a capacity of 17 litres. Filling of the AdBlue® tank can be done using 5 or 10 litre containers or 1.89 litre bottles.
Check that the product is within its use-by date. Read the instructions on the label. If you want to fill the AdBlue® tank yourself, ensure that you have a suitable filler pipe, which may or may not be supplied with the additive container. This operation can also be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
174
Practical information
Driving range
Advice
While the quantity of AdBlue® in the additive tank is sufficient, no information is displayed. On the other hand, once the additive level drops to the quantity needed for a range of 1 500 miles (2 400 km) driving, you are warned by different temporary signals (warning lamp, message, audible signal). When the AdBlue® tank is empty, restarting becomes impossible.
Press this button to display the information.
With the touch screen: - select the "Driving assistance" menu,
- select "Diagnostic",
It is strongly recommended that you do not wait for the successive alerts before topping-up the AdBlue® tank, but do this as soon as possible.
- select CHECK.
If the range is greater than 3 100 miles (5 000 km), a range value is not given.
Range indicators
7
Different levels of alert are triggered according to the remaining driving range threshold. You will be informed as each mileage threshold is reached and the alerts will change from temporary to permanent. - The 1st alert is triggered at a remaining
driving range of 1 500 miles (2 400 km). - The 2nd alert is triggered at a remaining
driving range of 375 miles (600 km). Up to 0 miles, at which point it will be impossible to restart the engine after a stop.
175
Practical information
Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km) Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km) Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue® additive
When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g.: "Top up emissions additive: Starting prevented in 900 miles") indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. When driving, the message is displayed every 200 miles (300 km) until the additive tank has been topped-up. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the AdBlue® tank topped-up. You can also top-up the tank yourself. For more information on topping-up the AdBlue® additive, refer to the corresponding section.
When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top up emissions additive: Starting prevented in 350 miles") indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. When driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds until the additive tank has been topped-up. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the AdBlue® tank topped-up. You can also top-up the tank yourself. Otherwise you will not be able to restart your engine.
When switching on the ignition, this warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Top up emissions additive: Starting prevented". The AdBlue® tank is empty: the system required by regulations prevents engine starting.
To be able to start the engine, we recommend that you call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for the top-up required. If you carry out the top-up yourself, it is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue® to the tank.
For more information on topping-up the AdBlue® additive, refer to the corresponding section.
176
Practical information
In the event of a fault with the SCR emissions control system
A system that prevents engine starting is activated automatically from 650 miles (1 100 km) after confirmation of a fault with the SCR emissions control system. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
In the event of the detection of a fault
During an authorised driving phase (between 650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)
Starting prevented
7
These warning lamps comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Emissions fault". The alert is triggered when driving when the fault is detected for the first time, then when switching on the ignition for subsequent journeys, while the fault persists.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert disappears during the next journey, after self-diagnosis of the SCR system.
If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed (after 30 miles (50 km) covered with the permanent display of the message signalling a fault), these warning lamps come on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g.: "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in 150 miles") indicating the remaining range express in miles or kilometres. While driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system persists. The alert is repeated when switching on the ignition. You should go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible. Otherwise, you will not be able to restart your engine.
Every time the ignition is switched on, these warning lamps come on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Emissions fault: Starting prevented".
You have exceeded the authorised driving limit: the starting prevention system inhibits engine starting.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
177
Practical information
Topping-up
Precautions to take
Use only AdBlue® additive that meets the ISO 22241 standard. The AdBlue® additive is an urea-based solution. This liquid is non-flammable, colourless and odourless. To be kept in a cool area.
In the event of an overflow, wipe around the filler mouth using a damp cloth.
If any AdBlue® fluid is split or splashed on to you, wash immediately with cold water or wipe yourself with a clean damp cloth. If the additive has crystallised, clean it off using a sponge and hot water.
Parking
Ensure that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface.
In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature of the vehicle is above -11°C. Otherwise, by freezing, the AdBlue® cannot be poured into its tank. Park your vehicle in a warmer area for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried out.
After filling the additive tank, observe the following procedure: - Switch on the ignition without starting. - Wait 10 seconds before starting the engine.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
Never dispose of empty AdBlue® containers and bottles in the household waste. Place them in a special container provided for this purpose or take them to your dealer.
178
Practical information
Filling
F Pour the contents of the bottle into your vehicle's AdBlue® tank.
Access
F For access to the AdBlue® tank, raise the boot carpet then, depending on equipment, lift out the spare wheel and/or the storage box.
Opening
F Without pressing, turn the black cap a quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off.
F Turn the blue cap a 6th of a turn anticlockwise.
F Lift off the cap.
Important: if your vehicle's AdBlue® tank is completely empty - which is confirmed by the alert messages and the impossibility of starting the engine, you must add at least 3.8 litres (so two 1.89 litre bottles).
F Wipe away any spillage around the tank filler using a damp cloth.
If any additive is split or splashed, wash immediately with cold water or wipe with a damp cloth. If the additive has crystallised, clean it off using a sponge and hot water.
Closing
F Refit the blue cap to the tank and turn it a 6th of a turn clockwise, to its stop.
F Refit the black cap and turn it a quarter of a turn clockwise without pressing. Ensure that the indicator on the cap lines up with the indicator on the support.
F Depending on equipment, return the spare wheel and/or the storage box to the bottom of the boot.
F Refit the boot carpet and close the tailgate.
7
179
Practical information
Advice
Important: in the event of a top-up after a breakdown because of a lack of additive, signalled by the message "Top up emissions additive: Starting prevented", you must wait around 5 minutes before switching on the ignition, without opening the driver's door, locking the vehicle or introducing the key into the ignition switch. Switch on the ignition, then, after 10 seconds, start the engine.
Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children, in its original container. Never transfer AdBlue® to another container: it would lose its purity. Never dilute the additive with water. Never pour the additive into the Diesel fuel tank.
Recommendations on storage
Freezing of the AdBlue® additive
AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C (12.2° F) and deteriorates above 25°C (77°F). It is recommended that containers and bottles be stored in a cool area and protected from direct sunlight. Under these conditions, the additive can be kept for at least a year. Additive that has been frozen can be used once it has thawed out in ambient air.
Never store containers or bottles of AdBlue® in your vehicle.
The SCR system includes an AdBlue® tank heater that ensures operation of the vehicle in normal conditions. In exceptional situations, such as when the vehicle is kept at temperatures below -15°C (5°F) for a long period, there may be an emission fault alert related to freezing of the AdBlue® additive. Park the vehicle in an area at a more moderate temperature for a few hours until the additive becomes a liquid again. The emissions warning lamp does not go off immediately, but does so after a few miles of driving.
180
Practical information
Straight cut matt paint
The following recommendations should be taken into account in the care and maintenance of the matt paint. They also appear in the servicing and warranty booklet for the vehicle. - Never clean the vehicle without water. - Never clean your vehicle in an automatic
roller-brush car wash. - Never polish the body or the alloy wheels.
This makes the paint bright.
- Do not use paint restorers, abrasive or polishing products or paint preservers (wax polish, for example) on the paintwork. These products are only suitable for bright finishes. Using them on vehicles finished with matt paint seriously damages the surface finish of the vehicle, resulting in particular in the appearance of irreversible bright or stained areas.
- Never use a high pressure jet washer fitted with a brush as this may scratch the paint surface.
- Never select a wash programme with a final hot wax cycle.
Textured paint
The textured paint reacts to light with variations of appearance and finish that emphasise the car's lines and form. This paint contains particles that remain visible and create a unique satin effect with relief. Its lightly granulated texture gives it a surprising feel.
Maintenance: Observe the following recommendations to avoid damaging the paint finish: - Choose a high pressure wash, or at least a
high water delivery; roller brush washing is compatible. - Gently wipe the body with a clean microfibre cloth. - Carefully wipe off any fuel spilt on the body using a soft cloth, then allow to dry. - Clean off minor marks (for example, finger marks), using the product in the "TECHNATURE" range intended for removing insects.
On the other hand: - Do not use a wash programme that
includes a final hot wax cycle. - Do not use waterless cleaning. - Never polish the vehicle. - Do not use paint restorers, abrasive
or polishing products, or bright paint preservers (wax polish, for example). It is always preferable to have paint repairs carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
7
181
In the event of a breakdown
Triangle
Before leaving your vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put on your high visibility vest.
Placing the triangle in the road
Refer to the manufacturer's instructions on using the triangle. F Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as
required by the legislation in force in your country.
The triangle is available as an accessory; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
182
Temporary puncture repair kit
The temporary puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a sealant cartridge allowing the temporary repair of a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage. It is designed to repair most punctures which could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread or shoulder. You can also use the compressor, without injection of sealant, to check and if necessary adjust the pressures of your tyres.
Access to the kit
In the event of a breakdown
Composition of the kit
8
This kit is installed in the storage box, under the boot floor.
1. 12 V compressor, with integral pressure gauge.
2. Sealant cartridge, with integral hose. 3. Speed limit sticker.
The vehicle's electric system allows the connection of the compressor for long enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture repair.
The speed limit sticker must be secured to the interior of the vehicle in the driver's field of vision, to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired using this type of kit.
183
In the event of a breakdown
Repair
F Switch off the ignition. F Secure the speed limit sticker inside
the vehicle.
Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre.
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor.
F Connect the pipe from the compressor to the sealant cartridge.
F Turn the the sealant cartridge and secure it in the cut-out provided on the compressor.
F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be repaired, and place it in a clean area.
F Connect the hose from the sealant cartridge to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten firmly.
184
In the event of a breakdown
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure is not attained, this indicates that the tyre is not repairable; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.
8
F Check that the compressor switch is at the "O" position.
F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under the compressor.
F Connect the compressor's plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Switch on the ignition.
F Start the compressor by placing the switch at the "I" position and leave it running until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bar.
The sealant product is injected into the tyre under pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk of splashing and stains).
Take care, the sealant product is harmful if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes. Keep this product out of the reach of children. The use-by date is marked on the cartridge. After use, do not discard the cartridge by the roadside, take it to a PEUGEOT dealer or an authorised waste disposal site. Don't forget to obtain a new sealant cartridge, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
185
In the event of a breakdown
Checking and inflating
F Place the switch in the "O" position. F Remove the kit.
F Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles (5 kilometres), at reduced speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.
F Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit.
To check and if necessary adjust the tyre pressures:
F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and place it in a clean area.
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor.
F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten firmly.
F Check that the compressor switch is at the "O" position.
F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under the compressor.
F Connect the compressor's plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Switch on the ignition.
186
In the event of a breakdown
8
F Start the compressor by placing the switch at the "I" position and adjust the pressure to the value shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label. To deflate: press the black button on the compressor pipe, at the valve connector.
F Once the correct pressure is reached, put the switch to the "O" position.
F Remove the kit then stow it.
After using the kit, refer to the corresponding sections to check the tyre pressures and reinitialise the under-inflation detection system.
187
In the event of a breakdown
Spare wheel
Procedure for changing a wheel for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
Access to the tools
List of tools*
The tools are installed in the boot under the floor. To gain access to them: F open the boot, F lift the floor and remove it, F remove the carrier box containing the tools.
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to the level of equipment. Do not use them for other purposes. 1. Wheelbrace.
For removing the wheel trim and removing the wheel bolts. 2. Jack with integral handle. For raising the vehicle. 3. "Bolt cover" tool. For removing the bolt protectors (covers) on alloy wheels.
4. Socket for the security bolts. For adapting the wheelbrace to the special "security" bolts.
5. Towing eye. See "Towing the vehicle".
* Depending on country of sale.
188
Wheel with trim
When refitting the wheel, refit the trim starting by placing its notch facing the valve and press around its edge with the palm of your hand.
Access to the spare wheel
In the event of a breakdown
8
The spare wheel is installed in the boot under the floor. According to country, the spare wheel may be steel, alloy or of the "space-saver" type. To gain access to it, refer to the paragraph "Access to the tools" on the previous page.
Taking out the wheel
F Unscrew the yellow central bolt. F Raise the spare wheel towards you from
the rear. F Take the wheel out of the boot.
189
In the event of a breakdown
Putting the wheel back in place
F Put the wheel back in its housing. F Unscrew the yellow central bolt by a few
turns then put it in place in the centre of the wheel. F Tighten fully until the central bolt clicks to retain the wheel correctly.
F Put the box back in the centre of the wheel and clip it in place.
190
In the event of a breakdown
Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not block traffic: the ground must be level, stable and not slippery. Apply the parking brake. Switch off the ignition. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear to block the wheels. With an electronic gearbox, place the lever in position R to block the wheels. With an automatic gearbox, place the lever in position P to block the wheels. Check that the parking brake warning lamps in the instrument panel come on. The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe. Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a jack; use an axle stand.
List of operations
F Remove the bolt cover from each of the bolts using the tool 3 (according to equipment).
F Fit the security socket 4 on the wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt (if fitted).
F Slacken the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.
Never use: - the jack for any other purpose than
raising the vehicle, - a jack other than the one provided
by the manufacturer.
F Place the foot of the jack 2 on the ground and ensure that it is directly below the front A or rear B jacking point provided on the underbody, whichever is closest to the wheel to be changed.
8
191
In the event of a breakdown
F Extend the jack 2 until it comes into contact with the jacking point A or B used; the contact area A or B on the vehicle must be correctly inserted into the central part of the head of the jack.
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient space between the wheel and the ground to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.
F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place.
F Remove the wheel.
Ensure that the jack is stable on a surface that is not slippery or loose and positioned only at the jacking point A or B under the vehicle, ensuring that the contact area on the vehicle is well centred on the head of the jack. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle and/or of the jack dropping or slipping - Risk of injury!
192
Fitting a wheel
In the event of a breakdown
8
Fitting the spare wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, when tightening the bolts on fitting, it is normal to notice that the washers do not come into contact with the spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the conical shoulder of each bolt (see drawing). When refitting the alloy wheel, ensure that the wheel bolt washers are clean and in good condition.
After changing a wheel
To store the punctured wheel in the boot correctly, first remove the central cover. If your vehicle has a "standard" 15-inch spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). If your vehicle is fitted with 16 or 17-inch wheels. use the "space-saver" type spare wheel and do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Have the tightening of the bolts and the pressure of the spare wheel checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay. Have the punctured tyre repaired and the wheel refitted to the vehicle as soon as possible.
193
In the event of a breakdown
List of operations
F Put the wheel in place on the hub. F Screw in the bolts fully by hand. F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 4 (if your vehicle has them). F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.
F Lower the vehicle fully. F Fold the jack 2 and detach it.
F Tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 4 (if your vehicle has them).
F Tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.
F Refit the bolt covers on each of the bolts (according to equipment).
F Store the tools in the box.
194
Changing a bulb
The headlamps have polycarbonate lenses with a protective coating: F do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent or solvent product, F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product, F when using a high pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance directed towards the lamps or their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals.
Changing a bulb should only be done after the headlamp has been switched off for several minutes (risk of serious burns). F Do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth. It is imperative to use only antiultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid damaging the headlamp. Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and specification.
Front lamps
A. Model with light guide
1. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W). 2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W). 3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
(light emitting diodes - LEDs). 4. Direction indicators (PWY-24W). 5. Front foglamps (directional according
to version) (H11-55W).
In the event of a breakdown
8
B. Model without light guide
1. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W). 2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W). 3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
(W5-5W). 4. Direction indicators (PWY-24W). 5. Front foglamps (directional according
to version) (H11-55W). In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.
195
In the event of a breakdown
C. GTi model
1. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W). 2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W). 3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
(light-emitting diodes - LEDs). 4. Direction indicators (light-emitting
diodes - LEDs). 5. Front foglamps (directional according
to version) (H11-55W).
Changing direction indicator bulbs
Rapid flashing of the direction indicator warning lamp (right or left) indicates the failure of a bulb on that side.
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and extract it.
F Pull out the bulb and change it. To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.
Amber coloured bulbs, such as the direction indicators, must be replaced with bulbs of identical specifications and colour. When refitting, close the protective cover carefully to preserve the sealing of the headlamp.
196
In the event of a breakdown
8
Changing dipped beam headlamp bulbs
F Remove the protective cover by pulling on the tab.
F Disconnect the bulb connector. F Spread the spring to release the bulb
(model A). F Extract the bulb and change it.
Changing main beam headlamp bulbs
F Disconnect the main headlamp connector. F Remove the protective cover by pulling on
the tab. F Disconnect the bulb connector. F Pull out the bulb and replace it.
Changing daytime running lamp / sidelamp bulbs
F Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and pull it out.
F Pull out the bulb and replace it. To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order, positioning the alignment lug at the bottom (model A) or at the top (model B).
To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order, positioning the alignment lug at the bottom.
197
In the event of a breakdown
Changing the daytime running lamps / sidelamps (light-emitting diodes - LEDs)
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Changing front foglamp / directional lamps
F Access to the front foglamp is through the orifice below the bumper.
F Disconnect the bulb holder connector by pressing on the top of the tongue.
F Extract the bulb holder by pressing on the two clips clips (top and bottom).
F Replace the module.
198
To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order. To obtain this module, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. You can also contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for this replacement.
In the event of a breakdown
Rear lamps
8
Changing integrated direction indicator side repeater bulbs
F Insert a flat screwdriver between the mirror glass and its base.
F Use the screwdriver as a lever to extract the mirror glass.
F Unclip the mirror shell by pressing on the two retaining clips.
F Press the central tongue and remove the side repeater.
F Pull the bulb holder out and replace the failed bulb.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order. You should contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of these bulbs.
1. Brake lamps (light-emitting diodes LEDs).
2. Reversing lamps (P21W). 3. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). 4. Sidelamps (light-emitting diodes -
LEDs).
5. Foglamp (P21W). 199
In the event of a breakdown
Light-emitting diodes - LEDs
For replacement, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop.
Changing reversing lamp and direction indicator bulbs
These two bulbs are changed from inside the boot:
F Open the boot. F Remove the access grille from the
corresponding side trim panel. F Slacken and remove the nut. F Disconnect the lamp unit connector. F Unclip the lamp unit carefully extract it
pulling in line towards the outside.
F Press the four tabs and remove the bulb holder.
F Turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and change it.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in reverse order. Take care to engage the lamp unit in its guides, while keeping it in line with the vehicle. Tighten sufficiently to ensure sealing, but without damaging the lamp.
200
In the event of a breakdown
8
Changing the third brake lamp bulbs
F Unscrew the fixing pins on each side of the lamp, without removing them completely.
F Push on the screws to unclip the lamp. F Disconnect the lamp connector. F Remove the lamp from the outside. F Turn the bulb holder which corresponds
to the faulty bulb one quarter of a turn and remove it. F Pull the bulb and change it. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order.
Number plate lamps
To facilitate the removal of the lamp, carry out this operation with the tailgate half open. F Insert a thin screwdriver into the lens
cutout. F Push it outwards. F Remove the lens. F Change the faulty bulb. To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.
Changing a foglamp bulb
Access is by passing a hand under the bumper. F Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and
pull it out. F Disconnect the connector on the bulb
holder. F Pull the bulb out and change it. To refit, carry out these operations in reverse order. You can also contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of these bulbs.
201
In the event of a breakdown
Fuses
Access to tools
The extraction tweezer is fitted to the back of the dashboard or glove box fusebox cover.
For the dashboard: F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left,
then right. F Disengage the cover completely and turn it
over. F Remove the carrier on which the tweezer is
fitted.
For the glove box: F Open the glove box lid. F Unclip the fusebox cover by pulling at top
right. F Disengage the cover fully and turn it over. F Remove the back of the carrier on which
the tweezer is fitted.
202
Before changing a fuse: F the vehicle must be immobilised with the
ignition off, F all electrical consumers must be switched
off, F identify the failed fuse using the tables and
layout drawings in the following pages.
To replace a fuse, you must: F use the special tweezer to extract the fuse
from its housing and check the condition of its filament. F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of the same rating (same colour); using a different rating could cause faults (risk of fire). If the fuse fails again soon after replacement, have the vehicle's electrical system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Professional repairers: for full information on the fuses and relays, consult the wiring information and diagrams available at a PEUGEOT dealer.
Good
Failed
Tweezer
The replacement of a fuse not shown in the tables below may cause a serious malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
In the event of a breakdown
Installing electrical accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is designed to operate with standard or optional equipment. Before installing other electrical equipment or accessories on your vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
8
PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied and not recommended by PEUGEOT and not installed in accordance with its instructions, in particular when the combined consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes.
203
In the event of a breakdown
On the left
Fuse N° F2 F9 F10 F11 F13 F16 F17 F18
Rating 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 5 A 15 A 15 A 20 A
Functions Door mirrors, headlamps, diagnostic socket. Alarm. Independent telematic unit, trailer interface. Electrochrome rear view mirror, additional heating. Hi-Fi amplifier, parking sensors Front 12 V socket. Audio system, audio system (accessory). Touch screen.
204
In the event of a breakdown
Fuse N° F23 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30
Rating 5 A 15 A 15 A 5 A 15 A 15 A
Functions Vanity mirror, map reading lamps. Horn. Screenwash pump. Anti-theft. Air conditioning compressor. Rear wiper.
8
205
In the event of a breakdown
On the right
206
Fuse N° F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F12
Rating 40 A 10 A 30 A 30 A 10 A 10 A 15 A 20 A -
Functions Heated rear window. Heated door mirrors. Front one-touch windows. Not used. Rear one-touch windows. Folding door mirrors. Folding door mirrors. Not used. Front heated seats. Hi-Fi amplifier. Not used. Not used.
Engine compartment
In the event of a breakdown
8
The fusebox is placed in the engine compartment near the battery (left-hand side).
Access to the fuses
F Unclip the cover. F Change the fuse (see corresponding
paragraph). F When you have finished, close the cover
carefully to ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.
Fuse N° F16 F18 F19 F25 F29
Rating 15 A 10 A 10 A 30 A 40 A
Functions Front foglamps. Right hand main beam headlamp. Left hand main beam headlamp. Headlamp wash relay (accessory). Front wiper motor.
207
In the event of a breakdown
12 V battery
Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.
General points
Lead-acid starter batteries
Batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must not, in any circumstances, be discarded with household waste. Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
Protect your eyes and face before handling the battery. All operations on the battery must be carried out in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames and sources of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion or fire. Wash your hands afterwards.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of specific technology and specification. Its replacement should be carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
If your vehicle has an electronic gearbox, do not try to start the engine by pushing the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, do not try to start the engine by pushing the vehicle.
Access to the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet. To gain access to it: F open the bonnet using the interior release
lever, then the exterior safety catch, F secure the bonnet stay, F remove the plastic cover on the (+)
terminal. The (-) terminal of the battery is not accessible. A remote earth point is located on the engine.
208
In the event of a breakdown
Starting using another battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be started using a slave battery (external or on another vehicle) and jump lead cables or a battery booster.
Never try to start the engine by connecting a battery charger. Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. First check that the slave battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity at least equal to that of the discharged battery. The two vehicles must not be in contact with each other. Switch off the electrical consumers on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, lighting, ...). Ensure that the jump lead cables do not pass close to moving parts of the engine (cooling fan, belts, ...). Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when the engine is running.
F Raise the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if your vehicle has one.
F Connect the red cable to the positive terminal (+) of the flat battery A (at the metal elbow) then to the positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B or the booster.
F Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal (-) of the slave battery B or the booster (or earth point on the other vehicle).
F Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point C on the broken down vehicle.
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery and leave it running for a few minutes.
F Operate the starter on the broken down vehicle and let the engine run. If the engine does not start straight away, switch off the ignition and wait a few moments before trying again.
F Wait until the engine returns to idle then disconnect the jump lead cables in the reverse order.
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if your vehicle has one.
F Allow the engine to run for at least 30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle stationary, so that the battery reaches an adequate state of charge.
Some functions, including Stop & Start, are not available if the battery is not sufficiently charged.
8
209
In the event of a breakdown
Charging the battery using a battery charger
For optimum service life of the battery, it is essential to maintain an adequate state of charge. In some circumstances it may be necessary to charge the battery: - if you use your vehicle essentially for short
journeys, - if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
several weeks. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Follow the instructions for use provided by the manufacturer of the charger. Never reverse polarities.
It is not necessary to disconnect the battery.
F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has one, on the (+) terminal.
F Connect the charger B cables as follows: - the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal of the battery A, - the negative (-) black cable to the earth point C on the vehicle.
F At the end of the charging operation, switch off the charger B before disconnecting the cables from the battery A.
If you envisage charging your vehicle's battery yourself, use only a charger compatible with lead-acid batteries of a nominal voltage of 12 V.
If this label is present, it is essential to use only a 12 V charger, to avoid causing irreversible damage to the electrical components related to the Stop & Start system.
F Switch off the ignition. F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, lighting, wipers, ...). F Switch off the charger B before connecting
the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any dangerous sparks. F Ensure that the charger cables are in good condition.
Never try to charge a frozen battery. If the battery has been frozen, have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, who will check that the internal components have not been damaged and the casing is not cracked, which could cause a leak of toxic and corrosive acid.
210
In the event of a breakdown
Disconnecting the battery
It is recommended that the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is not to be used for a very long period, so as to maintain an adequate state of charge for starting the engine. Before disconnecting the battery: F close all openings (doors, boot, windows,
roof), F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, wipers, lighting...), F switch off the ignition and then wait
four minutes. At the battery, simply detach the (+) terminal.
Quick-release terminal
Disconnecting the (+) cable
F Raise the lever D fully to release the cable terminal clamp E.
Reconnecting the (+) cable
F Position the open clamp E of the cable on the positive post (+) of the battery.
F Press vertically on the clamp E to position it correctly on the battery.
F Lock the clamp by spreading the positioning lug and then lowering the lever D. Do not apply excessive force on the tab as locking will not be possible if the clamp is not positioned correctly; start the procedure again.
Following reconnection of the battery
Following reconnection of the battery, switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to permit initialisation of the electronic systems. However, if problems remain following this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise (depending on version): - the remote control key, - ...
8
The Stop & Start system may not be operational during the trip following the first engine start. In this case, the system will only be available again after a continuous period of immobilisation of the vehicle, a period which depends on the ambient temperature and the state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 hours).
211
In the event of a breakdown
Towing
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.
Access to the tools
The towing eye is installed in the boot under the floor. To gain access to it: F open the boot, F lift the floor and remove it, F remove the towing eye from the holder.
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your country. Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle. The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing arm; rope and straps are prohibited. The towing vehicle must move off gently. When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service: - vehicle broken down on a motorway or
fast road, - four-wheel drive vehicle, - when it is not possible to put the
gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake, - towing with only two wheels on the ground, - where there is no approved towing arm available...
212
In the event of a breakdown
Being towed
F In the front bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at bottom right.
F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Install the towing arm. F With a manual gearbox, place the gear
lever in neutral.
F With an electronic gearbox, place the gear lever in position N.
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear lever in position N.
Failure to observe this instruction could result in damage to certain components (braking, transmission...) and the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started. F Unlock the steering by turning the
key in the ignition one notch and release the parking brake.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both vehicles.
F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short distance only.
Towing another vehicle
F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at the bottom.
F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Install the towing arm. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles. F Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
8
213
In the event of a breakdown
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel system must be primed if you run out of fuel. For all versions other than BlueHDi, refer to the corresponding engine compartment view.
For more information on the Diesel misfuel prevention device, refer to the corresponding section.
If the engine does not start first time, don't keep trying but start the procedure again from the beginning.
BlueHDi engine
F Add at least 5 litres of Diesel to the fuel tank.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times. F Operate the starter to run the engine.
1.6 HDi engine
(except BlueHDi) F Add at least 5 litres of Diesel to the fuel
tank. F Open the bonnet. F If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump. F Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may be resistance at the first press). F Operate the starter to start the engine (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again). F If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again then start the engine. F Refit the styling cover and clip it in place. F Close the bonnet.
Other engines
F Add at least 5 litres of Diesel to the fuel tank.
F Open the bonnet. F If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump. F Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may be resistance at the first press). F Operate the starter to start the engine (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again). F If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again then start the engine. F Refit the styling cover and clip it in place. F Close the bonnet.
214
General information
Engine characteristics
The engine characteristics (capacity, maximum power, maximum power speed, fuel, CO2 emissions...) for your vehicle are given in the registration document, as well as in sales brochures. These characteristics correspond to the values type-approved on a test bed, under conditions defined in European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC). For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Weights and towed loads
The maximum weights and towed loads for your vehicle are given are given in the registration document, as well as in sales brochures. These values are also present on the manufacturer's plate or label. For more information on these identification markings, refer to the corresponding section. For further information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). The gross train weight and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for every additional 1 000 metres. The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same amount. The recommended nose weight is the vertical load on the towball (removable with or without tools).
GVW: gross vehicle weight, the maximum authorised vehicle weight. GTW: gross train weight, the maximum authorised weight of vehicle
plus trailer.
Technical data
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the towed weight.
9
Towing with a lightly loaded vehicle can adversely affect roadholding. Braking distances are increased when towing a trailer. Never exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
215
Technical data
Petrol engines
Engine
Engine type code
1.0 PureTech 68 1.2 PureTech 68 1.2 PureTech 82 1.2 PureTech 82 S&S 1.2 PureTech 110 S&S
1.6 VTi 120
CE5 / KR5 (EB0 / EB0F)
QA5 (EB2FB)
CG5 / KQ5 (EB2 / EB2F)
CGP (EB2 MAPS)
KQV (EB2F)
CQJ / CZJ (EB2DT / EB2DTM)
CQQ / CZQ (EB2DT / EB2DTM)
CA5 (EP6C)
CAL (EP6C)
Gearbox
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
ETG5 electronic (5-speed)
ETG5 electronic (5-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Manual (5-speed) Automatic (4-speed)
Engine oil capacity with filter
replacement (in litres) 3.31
3.31
3.31
3.31
3.31
3.56
3.56
4.2
4.2
Unbraked trailer (kg)
450 450 (VASP-LCV)
-
520 520 (VASP - LCV)
520
Recommended nose weight (kg)
30 30 (VASP) - 46 (LCV)
-
46
46
500
33
570 / 450
46
570 / 450
46
580
46
580
46
1.6 THP 165 S&S
KHK (EP6FDT)
Manual (6-speed)
4.2
580
46
1.6 THP 208 S&S
KJK (EP6FDTX)
Manual (6-speed)
4.2
580
46
VASP : Special purpose vehicle (Véhicule Automoteur SPécialisé - France)
LCV: Light Commercial Vehicle
216
Diesel engines
Engine
Engine type code
1.6 HDi 75 1.6 BlueHDi 75 1.6 BlueHDi 75 S&S
1.6 HDi 92 1.6 e-HDi 92 S&S 1.6 BlueHDi 100
1.6 BlueHDi 100 S&S
1.6 BlueHDI 115 S&S 1.6 BlueHDi 120 S&S
BX5 (DV6EM)
KM5 (DV6FE)
KMJ (DV6FE)
BW5 / BF5 (DV6DM / DV6D)
BFS (DV6D)
KE5 (DV6FD)
KEJ (DV6FD)
KES (DV6FD)
LAK (DV6FCD)
KDK (DV6FC)
Technical data
Gearbox
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
ETG6 electronic (6-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
ETG6 electronic (6-speed)
Manual (6-speed)
Manual (6-speed)
Engine oil capacity with filter
replacement (litres) 3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
Unbraked trailer (kg)
Recommended nose weight (kg)
570
570 570 (VASP-LCV)
410 410 (VASP)
570 570 (VASP-LCV)
570
570 570 (VASP-LCV)
520 570 (LCV)
570
570
570
46 46 46 (LCV) - 30 (VASP) 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46
9
VASP : Special purpose vehicle (Véhicule Automoteur SPécialisé - France)
LCV : Light Commercial Vehicle
217
Technical data
Dimensions (in mm)
5-door
218
3-door
Affaire version
Number of seats: 2. Boot volume: 1.062 m3 Load floor length: 1.335 m. Load width between wheel arches: 1.042 m. Load width at centre: 1.061 m. Load height at centre: 0.857 m.
Technical data
9
219
Technical data
Identification markings
Various visible markings for the identification of your vehicle.
It bears the following information: - the tyre inflation pressures with and without
load, - the tyre sizes, - the inflation pressure of the spare wheel, - the paint colour code.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) under the bonnet. This number is engraved on the bodywork near the damper support.
C. Manufacturer's label. The VIN is indicated on a self-destroying label affixed to the middle pillar, on the passenger's side.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) at the bottom of the windscreen aperture. This number is indicated on a self-adhesive label which is visible through the windscreen.
D. Tyre/paint label. This label is fitted to the middle pillar, on the driver's side.
220
The tyre pressures must be checked when the tyres are cold, at least once a month.
Low tyre pressures increase fuel consumption.
Technical data
9
221
Audio and telematics
Emergency call
* Depending on the geographical cover of "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" and the official national language selected by the owner of the vehicle.
The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available from dealers or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
222
PEUGEOT Connect SOS
Test of operation of the system: The green indicator lamp comes on for 3 seconds when the ignition is switched on, signifying that a call can be made.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer if the orange indicator lamp comes on: - flashing, then off: the system has
a fault. - on fixed: the back-up battery
must be replaced.
In either case, the emergency and assistance calls service may not work. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
The fault with the system does not prevent the vehicle being driven.
Operation: "Emergency call". Pressing this button for more than 2 seconds starts a call to the PEUGEOT Connect SOS centre. - The green indicator lamp flashes. - A voice message confirms that the call is
being dealt with. The green indicator lamp on fixed indicates that communication has been established. It goes off at the end of the communication.
The "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" centre immediately locates your vehicle, communicates in your language*, and depending on the circumstances, makes a call to the appropriate public emergency services*.
Conditions for use: - In countries where the service is not
available, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is sent directly to the emergency services (112) without the vehicle location. 112 is the telephone number reserved for emergency calls and is accepted throughout the European Union. - "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" is subject to the terms and conditions for the service available from dealers, and to technological and technical limitations.
Inadvertent press: - pressing brings on the green indicator lamp. - pressing again immediately cancels
the call. A voice message confirms the cancellation. - if the call connects, explain to the contact that it was a mistake. The green indicator lamp goes off at the end of the call.
Assistance call
Peugeot Connect Assistance
In the event of a breakdown, pressing for more than 2 seconds starts the call. A voice message confirms that the call has been made.
Inadvertent press: - pressing again immediately cancels
the call. A voice message confirms the cancellation.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country, configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.
Audio and telematics
If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect Packs offer with the SOS and assistance pack included, there are additional services available to you in your MyPeugeot personal space, via the PEUGEOT Internet website in your country, accessible on www.peugeot.co.uk.
10
For technical reasons and in particular to improve the quality of "PEUGEOT CONNECT services" to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to update the vehicle's on-board telematic system.
223
Audio and Telematics
7-inch touch screen
GPS satellite navigation - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth® telephone
10
Contents
First steps
226
Steering mounted controls
228
Menus
229
Navigation
230
Navigation - Guidance
238
Traffic
242
Radio Media
244
Radio
250
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 252
Media
254
Settings
258
Connected services
266
Internet browser
267
MirrorLinkTM
270
CarPlay®
274
Telephone
278
Frequently asked questions
286
The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.
As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary. The display of an energy economy mode message signals that electrical systems operating are going into standby. Refer to the energy economy mode section.
225
Audio and Telematics
First steps
Use the buttons to the left of the touch screen for access to the menu carousels, then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Each menu is displayed in one or two pages (primary page and secondary page).
In very hot conditions, the system may go into stand-by (screen and sound completely off) for a minimum period of 5 minutes.
Primary page
Secondary page
226
Audio and Telematics
Short-cuts: using the touch buttons in the upper band of the touch screen, it is possible to go directly to the selection of audio source, the list of stations (or titles, depending on the source).
Press on Menu to display the menu carrousel.
Selection of audio source (depending on version): - FM /DAB* /AM stations. - USB memory stick. - CD player (located in the glove box)*. - Smartphone via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®. - Telephone connected by Bluetooth* and
with Bluetooth* audio streaming. - Media player connected to the auxiliary
socket (jack, cable not supplied). - Jukebox*, after first copying audio files to
the internal memory of the system.
Press on SRC to display the audio sources carrousel.
Volume adjustment (each source is independent, including traffic announcements (TA) and navigation instructions).
With the engine running, press to mute the sound. With the ignition off, press to switch the system on.
In very hot conditions, the volume may be limited to protect the system. The return to normal takes place when the temperature in the passenger compartment drops.
10
The screen is of the "resistive" type, it is necessary to press firmly, particularly for "flick" gestures (scrolling through a list, moving the map...). A simple wipe will not be enough. Pressing with more than one finger is not recognised. The screen can be used when wearing gloves. This technology allows use at all temperatures.
To clean the screen, use a soft non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) without any additional product. Do not use pointed objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
* Depending on equipment. 227
Audio and Telematics
Steering mounted controls
Press: mute on/ off. Increase volume. Decrease volume. Change audio source: radio, media. 228
Radio, rotate: automatic search for the previous/ next station. Radio, press: preset stations. Media, rotate: previous/ next track. Press: confirm a selection.
Telephone: start or answer a call. Call in progress: telephone menu (end call, secret mode, hands-free mode). Telephone, press and hold: reject an incoming call, end a call in progress; other than call in progress, telephone menu. Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Radio, press and hold: update the list of stations received.
Menus
Navigation
(Depending on equipment)
Radio Media
Audio and Telematics
Settings
10
Enter navigation settings and choose a destination.
Connected services
(Depending on equipment)
Select an audio source, a radio station, display photographs.
Adjust the settings for sound (balance, ambience, ...) and the display (language, units, date, time, ...).
Telephone
Driving
Connect using the "Internet browser". Operate certain applications on your smartphone via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®.
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®. Access to the CarPlay® function after connection of your smartphone by USB cable.
Access to the trip computer. Activate, deactivate or enter settings for certain vehicle functions.
229
Audio and Telematics
Navigation
Level 1
Level 2 Navigation
Level 3 Route settings
230
Level 1
Navigation Settings
Navigation
Navigation
Level 2 Enter destination
Route settings
Save current location Stop navigation Voice synthesis Diversion
Level 3
Fastest Shortest Time/distance Ecological Tolls Ferries Traffic Strict-Close Show route on map Confirm
Audio and Telematics
Comments Display recent destinations
10
Choose the navigation criteria. The map displays the route chosen according to these criteria.
Display the map and start navigation. Save the options. Save the current address.
Delete the navigation information. Choose the volume for voice and announcement of street names. Detour from your initial route by a determined distance. Display in text mode
Zoom in. Zoom out. Display in full screen mode. Use the arrows to move the map. Switch to 2D map.
231
Audio and Telematics Level 1 Navigation
232
Level 2 Enter destination
Level 3 Address
For managing contacts and their addresses, refer to the "Telephone" section.
Contacts
To use the telephone functions, refer to the "Telephone" section.
Level 1
Level 2 Address
Navigation Secondary page Enter destination
Contacts
On the map
Itinerary Stop Navigate to
Level 3 Current loc. Point of interest Town center Save Add waypoint Navigate to Addresses View Navigate to Search for contact Call
Audio and Telematics
Comments Address settings
10
Save the current address. Add a waypoint to the route. Press to calculate the route.
Select a contact then calculate the route.
Display the map and zoom to view the roads.
Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the itinerary. Delete navigation information. Press to calculate the route.
233
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Navigation 234
Search for a point of interest Point of interest displayed on the map
Level 1 Navigation
Secondary page Search for POI
Navigation Secondary page
Show POIs
Level 2 All POIs Motor Dining/hotels Personal Search Select all Delete Import POIs Confirm
Level 3
Audio and Telematics
Comments
List of categories available. After choosing the category, select the points of interest.
10
Save the settings.
Choose the display settings for POIs.
Save the options.
235
Audio and Telematics Level 1 Navigation
236
Level 2 Traffic messages
Map settings Settings
Level 3 Diversion
Map settings
Settings
Settings
Moving between the two menus.
Level 1 Navigation
Secondary page Traffic messages
Navigation Secondary page
Map settings
Navigation Secondary page
Settings
Level 2 On the route Around vehicle Near destination Detour Finish
Orientation
Maps
Aspect
Confirm Route settings Voice Alarm! Traffic options Confirm
Level 3
Detour over a distance Recalculate route
Flat view north heading Flat view vehicle heading Perspective view
"Day" map colour "Night" map colour Auomatic day/night
Audio and Telematics
Comments
Settings for the choice of messages and the filter radius.
10
Save your selections.
Choose the display and orientation of the map.
Save the settings.
Enter settings and choose the volume for the voice and announcement of street names.
Save your selections. 237
Audio and Telematics
Navigation - Guidance
Choosing a new destination
Towards a new destination
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Address".
Select the "Country:" from the list offered, then in the same way the "City:" or its post code, the "Road:", the "N°:". Confirm each time.
Select "Save" to save the address entered as a contact entry. The system allows up to 200 entries.
Select "Navigate to".
Choose the navigation criteria: "Fastest" or "Shortest" or "Time/ distance" or "Ecological".
Choose the restriction criteria: "Tolls", "Ferries", "Traffic", "Strict", "Close". Select "Confirm".
Or
Press on "Show route on map" to start navigation.
238
To delete navigation information, press on "Settings".
Press on "Stop navigation".
To resume navigation press on "Settings". Press on "Resume guidance".
Towards a recent destination
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select an address from the list offered.
Towards a contact
To be able to use navigation "towards a contact in the directory", it is first necessary to enter the address for your contact.
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press "Show route on map" to start navigation.
Select "Contacts".
Audio and Telematics
10
Select a destination from the contacts in the list offered. Select "Navigate to". Select the criteria then "Confirm" to start navigation.
239
Audio and Telematics
Towards GPS coordinates
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Towards a point on the map
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Towards points of interest (POI)
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different categories.
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Address".
Select "On the map".
Select "Search for POI".
Enter the "Longitude:" then the "Latitude:".
Select "Navigate to".
Zooming in on the map shows points with information.
A long press on a point opens its content.
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press "Show route on map" to start navigation.
Select "All POIs",
Or "Motor",
Or "Dining/hotels".
240
An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you. You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month. The detailed procedure is available on: http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Audio and Telematics
10
241
Audio and Telematics
Risk areas / Danger zone alert settings
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Alarm!" (Alert).
It is then possible to activate Risk areas alerts then: - "Audible warning" - "Alert only when navigating" - "Alert only for overspeed" - "Display speed limits" - Timing: the choice of timing allows the
time before giving a Risk areas alert to be defined.
Select "Confirm".
242
This series of alerts and displays is only available if Risk areas have first been downloaded and installed on the system.
Traffic
Traffic information
Display of messages
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Traffic messages".
Choose filter settings for: "On the route",
"Around",
"Near destination", filters to finetune the list of messages. Press again to remove the filter.
Audio and Telematics
Select the message from the list offered.
Setting filters
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Select the magnifying glass to have voice information.
Press on the secondary page. Select "Settings".
Receiving TA messages
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
10
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages on GPS-Navigation contain traffic information transmitted in real time.
Select "Traffic options".
Select: - "Be advised of new messages", - "Speak messages". Then enter the filter radius.
Select "Confirm".
We recommend a filter radius of: - 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas, - 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
Select "Voice".
Activate / Deactivate "Traffic (TA)".
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.
243
Audio and Telematics
Radio Media
Level 1
Level 2 List of FM stations
Save 244
Level 1 Radio Media
List
Radio Media Source
Radio Media Save
Level 2
List of FM stations
FM Radio DAB Radio AM Radio USB CD MirrorLinkTM CarPlay® iPod Bluetooth AUX Jukebox
Audio and Telematics
Comments Press on a radio station to select it.
10
Select change of source.
Press an empty location to Save it. 245
Audio and Telematics Level 1 Media
246
Level 2 List of FM stations
Photos
Copy to Jukebox
Level 3 Manage Jukebox
Level 1 Radio Media Secondary page
Radio list
Radio Media Secondary page
Photos
Radio Media Secondary page Manage Jukebox
Level 2 Save Update list Frequency Confirm Home screen Rotate Select all
Slideshow
Full screen Sort by folder Sort by album Select all Copy
Magnifying glass
Level 3
Previous photo. Pause / Play. Next photo.
Create folder Rename Delete Select all Confirm
Audio and Telematics
Comments Press a radio station to select it. Update the list of stations received. Enter the desired radio frequency. Save the settings. Display the selected photo in the home page. Rotate the photo 90°. Select all the photos in the list. Press again to deselect.
10
Display the photos in sequence, full screen. The system supports the following image formats: .gif, .jpg, .bmp, .png.
Display the selected photo full-screen.
Choose a selection mode.
Copy files to the Jukebox.
Choose the desired function.
Save the settings. 247
Audio and Telematics Level 1 Media
248
Level 2
Level 3
Settings
Settings Settings
Level 1 Radio Media Secondary page
Media list
Radio Media Secondary page
Settings
Level 2
Media Settings
Radio Settings
Announcements Settings Confirm
Level 3
Audio and Telematics
Comments Presentation of the last media used.
10
Shuffle (all tracks)
Shuffle (current album) Choose the play settings.
Repeat
Aux. amplification
RDS options
DAB/FM station tracking
Display Radio Text
Activate or deactivate the settings.
Digital radio slideshow display
Traffic announcements (TA)
News - Weather Sport - Programm info
Activate or deactivate the settings.
Flash - Unforeseen events
Save the settings.
249
Audio and Telematics
Radio
Selecting a station
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select "Save".
Changing a radio frequency
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select "List" in the primary page.
Or Press on Radio Media to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Radio list" in the secondary page.
Select a radio station from the list offered.
Select "Update list" to refresh the list.
To select a preset radio station. Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select a preset radio station in the list. If necessary, select change of source.
Select "FM Radio".
Or "AM Radio".
Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnel, car park, below ground...) may prevent reception, even in RDS station tracking mode. This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio system.
By automatic frequency search
Press 3 or 4 to move the cursor for an automatic search down or up for a radio frequency. THEN
Select change source.
Select "FM Radio".
Or "AM Radio".
250
Audio and Telematics
OR
Presetting a station
Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the corresponding section).
Activating / Deactivating RDS
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
10
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Press on "Save" (preset).
Press on the secondary page.
Press on the secondary page. Press on Frequency.
Select a number in the list to preset the previously chosen radio station. A long press on a number saves (presets) the station.
Select "Settings". Select "Radio".
THEN
Enter the frequency in full (e.g.: 92.10 MHz) using the keypad then "Confirm".
Changing radio station Pressing the name of the current radio station brings up a list. To change radio station press the name of the desired station.
Or
A press on this button presets all of the stations one after the other.
Recalling preset stations
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select "Save" (preset).
Activate/deactivate "RDS options".
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.
251
Audio and Telematics
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
Display of the name of the current station.
Short-cut: access to the choice of audio source and the list of stations (or titles, depending on the source).
Any thumbnail broadcast by the station.
Manage the Jukebox. Display current action.
Secondary page.
Previous "Multiplex". Previous radio station.
Display the name and number of the multiplex service being used.
Display of options: if active but not available, the display will be greyed out, if active and available, the display will be blank.
Select the radio station.
Select the audio source. Display the "DAB" band.
Display of "Radiotext" for the current station.
Next "Multiplex". Next radio station.
Preset stations, buttons 1 to 15. Short press: select the preset radio station. Long press: preset a radio station.
If the "DAB" radio station being listened to is not available on "FM", the "DAB FM" option is greyed out.
Journaline® is a text-based information service designed for digital radio systems. It provides text-based information structured around topics and sub-topics. This service is available from the "LIST OF DAB STATIONS" page.
252
Digital radio
Digital radio provides higher quality reception and also the graphical display of current information on the radio station being listened to. Select "List" in the primary page. The range of multiplexes available is displayed in alphabetical order.
DAB / FM auto tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory. When the digital radio signal is poor, "DAB/FM station tracking" allows you to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue station (if there is one).
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select change of source.
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "DAB Radio".
Select "Settings".
Select "List" in the primary page.
or Select "Radio list" in the secondary page.
Select the radio station from the list offered.
Select "Radio".
Select "Digital/FM auto tracking" then "Confirm".
Audio and Telematics
If "DAB/FM station tracking" is activated, there is a difference of a few seconds when the system switches to "FM" analogue radio with sometimes a variation in volume. When the digital signal is restored, the system automatically changes back to "DAB".
10
If the "DAB" station being listened to is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM" option greyed out), or "DAB/FM station tracking" is not activated, the sound will cut out while the digital signal is too weak.
253
Audio and Telematics
Media
USB player
Auxiliary (AUX) socket
Selecting the source
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select change of source.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port or connect the USB device to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
The system builds playlists (in temporary memory), an operation which can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or connection of a USB memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they are not modified, the subsequent loading time will be shorter.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player...) to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable (not supplied).
First adjust the volume of your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your audio system. Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.
CD player
Insert the CD in the player.
Choose the source.
The steering mounted SRC (source) button can be used to go to the next media source, available if the source is active.
Press on OK to confirm the selection.
254
Audio and Telematics
Information and advice
The audio equipment will only play audio files with".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and. mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. No other type of file (.mp4, ...) can be played. ".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9 type. The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and 48 KHz.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard. If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT 32 (file allocation table).
10
The system does not support the simultaneous connection of two identical devices (two memory sticks, two Apple® players) but it is possible to connect one memory stick and one Apple® player at the same time.
It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.
The system supports USB mass storage devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players via USB ports. The adaptor cable is not supplied. Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls. Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not supplied).
It is recommended that the USB cable for the portable device is used.
255
Audio and Telematics
Bluetooth® audio streaming
Streaming allows audio files on your telephone to be played through the vehicle's speakers.
Connecting Apple® players
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" section, then "Bluetooth". Choose the "Audio" or "All" profile.
If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the telephone. Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be a media source. It is recommended that you activate "Repeat" on the Bluetooth peripheral.
Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists/ albums/ genres/ playlists/ audiobooks/ podcasts). The default classification used is by artist. To modify the classification used, return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification (playlists for example) and confirm to go down through the menu to the desired track.
The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple® player.
256
Managing the Jukebox
Connect the device (MP3 player...) to the USB port or auxiliary Jack socket using a suitable audio cable.
When no audio file is copied to the system, which has a capacity of 8 GB, all of the Jukebox function symbols are greyed and are not available.
Select "Media list". Or
Select copy "Copy Jukebox".
Select "Sort by folder".
Or "Sort by album".
Select the magnifying glass to enter the folder or album and select audio file by audio file. Select "Confirm" then "Copy".
Select "New folder" to create a folder structure in the Jukebox.
Select "Keep structure" to retain the structure from the device.
While copying the system returns to the primary page; you can go back to the copy view at any time by selecting this button.
Audio and Telematics
10
257
Audio and Telematics
Settings
Level 1
Level 2 Audio settings
Level 3 Audio settings
Audio settings
258
Level 1
Settings Audio settings
Settings Turn off screen
Level 2 Ambience Balance Sound effects Ringtones Voice Confirm
Level 3
Audio and Telematics
Comments Choose the sound ambience.
Sound distribution using the Arkamys® system.
Set the volume or activate the link to vehicle speed.
Set the telephone ringtone and volume.
Set the volume and voice for speaking street names Save your settings.
Function that turns off the display. Pressing the screen reactivates it.
10
259
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Configuration
260
Level 2 Units
Adjust date and time
Display screen
Factory settings
Level 1
Settings Secondary page System Settings
Settings Secondary page
Time/Date
Settings Secondary page Screen settings
Units
Level 2
Delete data
Factory settings
Confirm
Confirm
Activate automatic text scrolling Activate animations Confirm
Audio and Telematics
Comments Set the units used to display distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Select the desired data in the list then press Delete.
Return to factory settings.
10
Save the settings.
Set the date and time then confirm.
Activate or deactivate the setting then confirm.
261
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Configuration
262
Level 2 Choice of language
Calculator
Calendar
Level 1 Settings
Secondary page Languages
Settings Secondary page
Calculator
Settings Secondary page
Calendar
Confirm
Level 2
Audio and Telematics
Comments Select the language then confirm.
10
Select the calculator.
Select the calendar.
263
Audio and Telematics
Audio settings
Press on Settings to display the primary page. Select "Audio settings".
Select "Ambience"
Or "Balance"
Or "Sound effects"
Or "Ringtones"
Or "Voice".
264
The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys® system) of sound is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted to the number of passengers in the vehicle. Available only with the 6-speaker configuration.
The audio settings (Ambience, Bass:, Treble: and Loudness) are different and independent for each sound source. The settings for Distribution and Balance are common to all sources.
- "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical ambiences)
- "Bass:" - "Treble:" - "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate) - "Distribution" ("Driver", "All
passengers", "Front only") - "Audible response from touch
screen" - "Volume linked to speed"
(Activate/Deactivate)
On-board audio: Arkamys© Sound Staging optimises sound distribution in the the passenger compartment.
Modifying system settings
Press on Settings to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "System Settings".
Select "Units" to change the units of distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Select "Delete data" to delete the list of recent destinations, personal points of interest, contacts in the list.
Choose the item then select "Delete".
Select "Factory settings" to return to the original settings.
Press on Settings to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Screen settings".
Activate or deactivate "Activate automatic text scrolling" and "Activate animations".
Audio and Telematics
Press on Settings to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page
10
Select "Time/Date" to change the time zone, synchronisation with GPS, the time and its format, then the date.
Select "Languages" to change language.
Select "Calculator" to display a calculator.
Select "Calendar" to display a calendar.
265
Audio and Telematics
Connected services
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
266
Internet browser
Press on Connected services to display the primary page.
Press on "Internet browser" to display the browser home page; first connect your smartphone by Bluetooth, "Internet" option, see the "Telephone" section.
Authentication for Internet browsing via a smartphone is done using the Dial-Up Networking (DUN) standard.
Some smartphones of the latest generation do not support this standard.
Audio and Telematics
10
267
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Internet connection settings
Level 2 Bluetooth (devices)
Usage monitor
Wi-Fi connection 268
Level 1
Connected services Secondary page Bluetooth connections
Connected services Secondary page Transfer rate
Connected services Secondary page Wi-Fi connection
Search
Level 2
Connect /Disconnect
Update Delete Confirm
Reset
Confirm
All Secure Remember Add On/ Off Connect
Audio and Telematics
Comments Start the search for a device to connect.
Start or end the Bluetooth connection to the selected device. Import contacts from the selected telephone to save them in the audio system. Delete the selected telephone.
Save the settings.
10
Reset the usage monitor, them confirm.
Display all Wi-Fi networks.
Display secure Wi-Fi networks.
Memorise the selected Wi-Fi network(s).
Add a new Wi-Fi network.
Activate or deactivate a Wi-Fi network. Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and connect to it.
269
Audio and Telematics
MirrorLinkTM
Optional depending on the smartphone and operating system.
270
MirrorLinkTM smartphone connection
As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. All operations must be done with the vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a smartphone allows applications on a smartphone that are adapted to the MirrorLinkTM technology to be displayed in the vehicle's screen. The principles and standards are constantly evolving. For the communication process between the smartphone and the system to work correctly, the smartphone must be unlocked; update the operating system of your smartphone as well as the date and time in the smartphone and the system. For the list of eligible smartphones, connect to the brand's internet website in your country.
Audio and Telematics
As a safety measure, applications can only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; display is interrupted once the vehicle is moving.
Please note: - if your smartphone is supported, to
make it "MirrorLinkTM" compatible, some phone manufacturers nevertheless invite you to first download a dedicated application.
When connecting a smartphone to the system, it is recommended that Bluetooth® be started on the smartphone.
Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable.
Start the application on the smartphone (optional, depending on the smartphone and operating system).
10
During the procedure, several screen pages relating to certain functions are displayed. Accept to start and end the connection.
Once connection is established, an page is displayed with the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLinkTM technology. If only one application has been downloaded to the smartphone, it starts automatically.
Access to the different audio sources remains accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons
From the system, press on "Connected services" to display the primary page.
Press on "MirrorLinkTM" to start the application in the system.
Voice recognition
Press the end of the lighting control stalk to start voice recognition of your smartphone via the system. Voice recognition requires a compatible smartphone connected to the vehicle by Bluetooth.
271
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
272
Level 1
Level 2
Connected services
MirrorLinkTM
Level 3
Audio and Telematics
Comments
Access or return to the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLinkTM technology.
10
Access to a menu list depending on the application chosen. "Back": abandon the current operation, go up one level. "Home": access or return to the "Car mode" page.
Access to the "Connected services" primary page.
273
Audio and Telematics
CarPlay®
274
Audio and Telematics
CarPlay® smartphone connection
As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. All operations must be done with the vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a
Or
smartphone that are adapted to the
CarPlay® technology to be displayed in
the vehicle's screen.
As the principles and standards are
constantly evolving, it is recommended
that you update the operating system of
your smartphone.
For the list of eligible smartphones,
connect to the brand's internet website
in your country.
Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable.
On connecting the USB cable, the "Telephone" function changes to "CarPlay" in the menu carrousel. Press on "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® interface.
Voice recognition
Press the end of the lighting control stalk to start voice recognition of your smartphone via the system.
10
Connect the USB cable. The smartphone is charged while connected by the USB cable.
From the system, press on "Connected services" to display the primary page.
Press on "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® interface.
As a safety measure, applications can only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; display is interrupted once the vehicle is moving.
During the procedure, one or more screen pages relating to certain functions are displayed on connection.
275
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
276
Level 1
Level 2 Telephone
Connected services Apple® CarPlay®
Music Plan
Messages Playing
Level 3 Favourites Calls Contacts Keypad Messages Lists Artists Tracks Albums Other...
Destinations
Display messages
Audio and Telematics
Comments
The "Telephone" function is placed automatically in "Siri" voice mode. Press on "Display contacts" for access to the telephone menus.
10
Press on "Music" to browse and select the tracks on your smartphone. Press on "Playing" for access to the track currently playing.
Press on "Destinations" to search for an address by "Siri" voice command or by using the keypad. The GPS function is through the telephone's 3G, 4G or Wi-Fi internet connection.
The "Messages" function is place automatically in "Siri" voice mode to speak the message and the addressee. Press on "Display messages" for access to the messages.
Access to the track currently playing. 277
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
Level 1
278
Level 2 Call log
Contacts
Level 3
Level 1
Telephone Call log
Level 2 All calls Incoming calls Outgoing calls Contacts
Magnifying glass
Call Addresses
Telephone Contacts
View
Navigate to Search for contact Call
Level 3
View Create
Create Modify Delete Delete all By name Confirm
Audio and Telematics
Comments
10
After making choices, start the call.
After making choices, start the call.
279
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Telephone connection
Level 2 Bluetooth (devices)
Devices detected
Telephone Options
280
Level 3
Level 1
Telephone connection Secondary page Bluetooth connection
Telephone connection Secondary page
Search for devices
Telephone connection Secondary page Telephone Options
Level 2 Search Connect / Disconnect Update Delete Confirm
Devices detected
Put on hold Update Ringtones Memory info. Confirm
Level 3
Telephone Audio streaming Internet
Audio and Telematics
Comments Start the search for another peripheral device to connect. Start or stop the Bluetooth connection to the selected peripheral device. Import the contacts from the selected telephone to store them in the audio system.
Delete the selected telephone.
Save the settings.
10
Start the search for peripheral devices.
Cut the microphone temporarily so that the contact cannot hear your conversation with a passenger. Import the contacts from the selected telephone to save then in the audio system. Choose the telephone ringtone and volume. Contact records used and free, percentage of storage space used by internal contacts and Bluetooth contacts. Save the settings.
281
Audio and Telematics
Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio system must be carried out with the vehicle stationary.
Procedure from the system
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone configuration).
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Procedure (short) from the telephone
In the Bluetooth menu of your device, select the system name in the list of devices detected.
Enter a code of at least 4 figures in the device and confirm.
Enter this same code in the system, select "OK" and confirm.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection".
Select "Search for devices". The list of telephones detected is displayed.
If the telephone is not detected, it is recommended that you switch the Bluetooth function on your telephone off and then on again.
Select the name of the desired peripheral from the list and "Confirm".
Enter a code of at least 4 figures for the connection then "Confirm".
Enter this same code in the telephone then accept the connection.
The system offers to connect the telephone: - in "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only), - in "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless
playing of audio files from the telephone), - in "Internet" (internet browsing, only if your
telephone is compatible with the "DUN" Dial-Up Networking Bluetooth standard). Select one or more profiles and confirm.
282
Audio and Telematics
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.
Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to accept or not the transfer of your contacts.
If not, select "Update".
The ability of the system to connect with only one profile depends on the telephone. The three profiles may all connect by default.
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, additional help, ...).
The recognised telephone appears in the list.
On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone connected is present again, it is reconnected automatically and within around 30 seconds after switching on the ignition the pairing is done without any action on your part, with (Bluetooth activated). To modify the automatic connection mode, select the telephone in the list then select the desired profile.
Depending on your telephone, you may be asked to accept automatic connection every time the ignition is switched on.
Connecting a Bluetooth® peripheral device
Automatic reconnection
10
On switching on the ignition, the telephone connected when the ignition was last switched off is automatically reconnected, if this connection mode had been activated during the pairing procedure.
The connection is confirmed by the display of a message and the name of the telephone.
Manual connection
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list of paired peripherals.
Select the peripheral to connect. Press on "Search for devices".
The connection is confirmed by the display of a message and the name of the telephone.
283
Audio and Telematics
Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral device as well as the deletion of a pairing.
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list of paired peripheral devices.
Select the peripheral in the list. Select "Search for devices"
Or "Connect / Disconnect" to start or end the Bluetooth connection with the selected device.
Or "Delete" to delete the pairing.
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering mounted TEL button to accept an incoming call. Make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button to reject the call.
Or Select "End call".
Making a call
Using the telephone is not recommended while driving. Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering mounted controls.
Calling a new number
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Enter the phone number using the digital keypad. Press "Call" to start the call.
Calling a contact
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button.
284
Managing contacts / entries
Select "Contacts".
Select the desired contact from the list offered. Select "Call".
Calling a recently used number
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Or Select "Call log".
Press on Telephone to display the primary page. Select "Contacts". Select "View". Select "Create" to add a new contact.
"Modify" to edit the selected contact.
Or Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; park the vehicle first as a safety measure.
Or
"Delete" to delete the selected contact.
"Delete all" to delete all information for the selected contact.
Audio and Telematics
Select "By name" to view the list of contacts.
10
285
Audio and Telematics
Frequently asked questions
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
Navigation
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The route calculation is not The route settings may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
successful.
toll roads on a toll motorway).
menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected.
Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The Risk areas audible warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active.
Activate audible warnings in the "Navigation" menu.
The system does not
The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages.
suggest a detour around an
incident on the route.
Select the "Information" function in the list of route settings.
I receive a Risk areas alert which is not on my route.
Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for Risk areas located on nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the Risk areas. Select "On the route" to no longer receive alerts other than navigation instructions or to reduce the time for the announcement.
286
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
Certain traffic jams along the route are not indicated in real time.
ANSWER
SOLUTION
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive Wait until the traffic information is being received
the traffic information.
correctly (display of the traffic information icons
on the map).
The filters are too restrictive.
Modify the settings.
10
The altitude is not displayed.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traffic information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely so
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions.
287
Audio and Telematics
Radio
QUESTION
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
ANSWER The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.
SOLUTION Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. through a car wash or into an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of stations received.
The name of the radio station changes.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example). The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
Press and hold the "List" button at the steering mounted controls to update the list of stations received or press on the system update function: "Update list".
288
Audio and Telematics
Media
QUESTION
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
ANSWER
Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).
SOLUTION
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the file structure on the memory stick.
When I connect my iPhone as a telephone and to the USB port at the same time, I am unable to play the music files.
When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the track being played with Apple® players.
Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the USB function takes priority over streaming).
The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player (udf...). played if it is too badly damaged.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio system.
Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section. The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
Some recorded CDs will not be played by the
audio system because they are not of adequate
quality.
There is a long waiting
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain
period following the insertion amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few
of a CD or connection of a seconds to a few minutes.
USB memory stick.
This phenomenon is normal.
10
289
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
The CD player sound is poor.
ANSWER The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
SOLUTION
Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.
Some characters in the media information are not displayed correctly while playing.
The audio system does not display some types of characters.
Use standard characters to name tracks and folders.
Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device. does not start.
The names of tracks and the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
290
Audio and Telematics
Settings
QUESTION In changing the setting of treble and bass the equalizer setting is deselected.
ANSWER
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings. Modifying one without the other is not possible.
SOLUTION
Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
10
In changing the equalizer setting, treble and bass return to zero.
When changing the balance settings, the distribution setting is deselected.
When changing an distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or distribution settings to
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
obtain the desired musical ambience.
291
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources.
ANSWER
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Loudness, Ambience, Treble, Bass, Volume can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source.
SOLUTION
Check that the audio settings (Loudness, Ambience, Treble, Bass, Volume) are adapted to the sources listened to. Adjust Balance, Treble and Bass to the middle position, select the "None" musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
charge.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
292
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
QUESTION I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone.
ANSWER The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone may not be visible.
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.
SOLUTION
Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".
10
You can check the compatibility of your telephone at www.peugeot.co.uk (services).
The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone communication.
Some contacts are duplicated in the list.
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.
Contacts are not shown in Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings
alphabetical order.
chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.
Increase the volume of the audio system, to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow down...). Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display telephone contacts".
Modify the display setting in the telephone directory.
The system does not
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages
receive SMS text messages. to the system.
293
Audio system / Bluetooth®
Audio and Telematics
First steps Steering mounted controls Radio Media Telephone Audio settings Configuration Screen menu map(s) Frequently asked questions
10
Contents 296 297 298 300 304 307 308 309 310
As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary. When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the system switches off after activation of energy economy mode.
295
Audio and Telematics
First steps
On / Off, volume adjustment.
Select the source: Radio: FM1, FM2, AM, CD, USB, AUX, Streaming. Telephone: accept an incoming call. Telephone, press and hold: end a call, access the calls log for the connected telephone.
Adjust audio settings: sound ambience, treble, bass, loudness, distribution, left/right balance, front/ rear balance, automatic volume.
296
Automatic search for a lower radio frequency. Select the previous CD, USB track. Navigation in a list. Press and hold: fast back.
Display the list of stations received, the CD/USB tracks or folders. Press and hold: update the list of stations received.
Abandon the current operation. Go up one level (menu or folder).
Automatic search for a higher radio frequency. Select the next CD, USB track. Navigation in a list. Press and hold: fast forward. Open the main menu.
Select a preset radio station. Radio, press and hold: preset a radio station. Other than radio: see the corresponding sections.
Eject CD.
Steering mounted controls
Radio: select the previous / next preset station. CD / USB: select the genre / artist / folder / playlist from the list depending on classification. Select the previous / next item in a menu.
Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency. CD / MP3 / USB: select the next track. CD / USB: press and hold: fast forward.
Change the audio sound. Confirm a selection. Start/end call with the telephone. Press and hold: access to the call log.
Audio and Telematics
Radio: automatic search for a lower frequency. CD / MP3 / USB: select the previous track. CD / USB: press and hold: fast back.
10
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Mute: cut the sound by simultaneously pressing the volume increase and decrease buttons. Restore the sound: by pressing one of the two volume buttons.
297
Audio and Telematics
Radio
Presetting a station
Press SRC/TEL repeatedly to select the FM1, FM2 or AM waveband.
Press and hold one of the buttons to preset the station being listened to. The name of the station is displayed and an audible signal confirms the preset.
Managing a list
Press LIST to display the list of stations received in alphabetical order.
Select the desired radio station using one of the buttons.
Entering a frequency
Press on MENU.
Select "Radio".
Confirm with "OK".
Select "Write freq.".
The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnel, car park, below ground...) may prevent reception, even in RDS station tracking (alternative frequencies) mode. This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio system.
Selecting a station
Press a button to listen to the corresponding preset station.
Briefly press one of the buttons to change to the next or previous letter.
or
Press and hold on LIST to build or update the list of stations; audio reception is cut momentarily.
Press +.
press - to select the desired frequency. Confirm with "OK".
298
Audio and Telematics
RDS
RDS, if activated, enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.
With source FM1 or FM2, press MENU.
Select "Radio".
Select or deselect "RDS" to switch RDS on or off.
Confirm with "OK" to save the setting.
Receiving TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.
Press MENU.
Select "Radio".
Select or deselect "TA" to activate or deactivate the reception of traffic messages.
Confirm with "OK" to save the setting.
Displaying RADIO TEXT
Radio text is information transmitted by the radio station related to the current programme or song.
10
With the radio displayed on the screen, press MENU.
Select "Radio".
Select or deselect "TXT" to activate or deactivate the display of Radio Text. Confirm with "OK" to save the setting.
299
Audio and Telematics
Media
USB player
This unit comprises a USB port and a Jack auxiliary socket, depending on model.
The system constitutes playlists (in temporary memory) the creation time for which can be from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Limiting the number of non-music files and the number of folders reduces this waiting time. The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick is connected. The lists are memorised: if there is no change in the lists, the next loading time will be shorter.
At a first connection, the order suggested is by folder. When connecting again, the order previously chosen is retained.
Connect a USB memory stick to the USB port or connect a USB device to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Press SRC/TEL repeatedly to select "USB".
Press one of these buttons to select the next or previous track in the list.
Press one of these buttons to select the next or previous folder in the order chosen.
Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or back.
300
Press LIST to display the structure of the folders in the compilation. Select a line in the list.
Confirm with "OK".
Up a level in the menu.
Press MENU.
Select "Media".
Select or deselect "TA" to switch traffic announcements on or off.
Select the play mode: "Normal", "Random", "Random all" or "Repeat".
Audio and Telematics
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Connect the portable device (MP3 player...) to the Jack auxiliary socket using an audio cable (not supplied).
Press SRC/TEL repeatedly to select "AUX".
First adjust the volume on the portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume on your audio system. Control is from the portable device.
Do not connect a given device to both the Jack auxiliary socket and the USB port at the same time.
CD player
Insert a CD into the player, play starts automatically. Insert an MP3 compilation CD into the CD player. The audio system searches for audio tracks, which can take from a few to several dozen seconds before play starts.
Press the SRC/TEL button repeatedly to select "CD".
Press one of these buttons to go the the previous or next track in the list.
Press one of these buttons to select the previous or next folder according to the category chosen.
Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or back.
Press LIST to display the folder structure of the compilation.
Select a line in the list.
10
Confirm with "OK".
Return to the top level of the folder structure to select the type of tracks. - By Folders (CD or USB): all folders
containing audio files recognised on the peripheral device, in alphabetical order without following the folder structure. - By Artist (USB only): all of the artist names defined in the ID3 Tags, in alphabetical order. - By Genre (USB only): all of the genres defined in the ID3 Tags. - By Playlist (CD or USB): if playlists have been saved.
301
Audio and Telematics
Information and advice
The audio system will only play files with ".mp3", ".wma" and ".wav" on a CD and can play files with ".ogg" extension only on USB.
It is recommended that file names be of no more than 20 characters and avoiding special characters (ex : " ? ; ù) so as to avoid any problem reading or displaying the files.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet. If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.
The playlists accepted on CD, MP3, iPod and USB connection are types ".m3u" and ".wpl". The number of files recognised is limited to 5 000 in 500 folders on a maximum of 8 levels.
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files spread over 8 folder levels with a maximum of 192 folders. However, it is recommended that this be kept to 2 levels so as to limit the time taken to access and play the CD. During play, the folder structure is not observed.
Do not connect a hard disk or USB device other than audio players to the USB port. This may cause damage to your installation.
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32 (File Allocation Table).
The use of genuine Apple® USB cables is recommended to ensure correct operation.
302
Audio and Telematics
Bluetooth® audio streaming
Streaming allows music files on a telephone to be heard via the vehicle's speakers.
Activate the streaming source by pressing the SRC/TEL* button.
10 Connecting Apple® players
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" section.
In the "Bluetooth: Audio" menu, select the telephone to connect. The audio system connects automatically to a newly paired telephone.
Control of playback is via the audio system. The control of common tracks is possible via the audio system control buttons and the steering mounted controls**. Contextual information can be displayed in the screen.
The audio quality depends on the quality of the transmission from the telephone.
* In certain cases, the play of audio files must be initiated from the keypad.
** If the telephone supports the function.
Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically.
Management of the device is via the audio system controls.
The classifications available are those on the portable player connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists/ audiobooks / podcasts).
The software version of the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple® player.
303
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
Pairing a Bluetooth telephone
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more help, ...).
A window is displayed with "Searching device".
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to find out which services are available to you.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is set as visible to all (refer to the telephone instructions).
Select the telephone to be paired from the list.
Confirm with "OK".
Press the MENU button.
Only one telephone can be paired at a time.
Select "Bluetooth". Select "Search".
In some cases, the Bluetooth address of the telephone may appear instead of the name of the telephone.
A virtual keypad is displayed on the screen: choose a 4 digit code.
Confirm with "OK".
A message is displayed in the screen of the telephone: enter the same code and confirm.
If pairing fails, try again; the number of attempts is not limited. A message appears in the screen to confirm the result of the connection.
Pairing can also be initiated from the telephone by searching for detected Bluetooth devices.
The directory and the calls list can be accessed after the synchronisation period (if the telephone is compatible). Automatic connection must be configured in the telephone to allow the connection each time the vehicle is started.
304
Audio and Telematics
Managing connections
Press the MENU button.
Select "Bluetooth".
Select "BT management" and confirm. The list of paired telephones is displayed. Indicates connection of the audio profile. Indicates connection of the handsfree profile.
In the list, select a telephone to pair.
Confirm with "OK".
Select or deselect: - "Tel.": hands-free connection - "Audio": play audio files
"OK" to confirm the choice.
Making a call
From the directory
Press the MENU button.
Select "Telephone".
10
"Delete" to delete the pairing.
Select "Call".
It is not possible to pair more than 5 telephones. Press MENU and select "Bluetooth". Select "BT management". If 5 telephones are already paired, select the telephone to delete by pressing "OK" and selecting "Delete" (refer to the "Managing connections" section).
Select "Directory". Select the desired number. Confirm with "OK" to start the call.
305
Audio and Telematics
Making a call
Recently called numbers*
Press and hold SRC/TEL to display the calls list.
For access to the calls list, it is also possible to press MENU, select "Telephone", then select "Call", and finally select "Calls list".
In the list of calls, select the number and choose "Missed calls", "Dialed calls" or "Answered calls".
Scroll through the calls list.
Confirm with "OK".
* Depending on the compatibility of the telephone.
306
Receiving a call
Press one of these buttons to go to the previous or next page in the list.
"OK" starts the call.
The calls list includes the calls sent from and by from the vehicle via the connected telephone. It is possible to make a call directly from the telephone; stop the vehicle as a safety measure.
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.
Press SRC/TEL.
or select "YES" to accept the call,
or select "NO" to reject the call.
Pressing and holding the back button,
or on SRC/TEL also rejects an incoming call.
Audio and Telematics
Managing calls
Hang up
In the contextual menu, select "Hang up" to end the call.
Pressing and holding on SRC/TEL also ends the call.
Secret - Mute
(so that the caller cannot hear)
In the contextual menu: Select "Micro OFF" to switch off the microphone.
Select "Micro OFF" to switch the microphone on again.
Combined mode
(to leave the vehicle without ending the call)
From the contextual menu: Select "Combined mode" to transfer the call to the telephone.
Select "Combined mode" to transfer the call to the vehicle.
In certain cases, the combined mode has to activated from the telephone. The Bluetooth connection will be restored automatically if the ignition has been switched off, then on again (depending on the compatibility of the telephone).
Audio settings
Press ¯ to display the audio settings menu. Press ¯ to go to the next setting.
10
The settings available are: - AMBIANCE: BASS, TREBLE and
LOUDNESS. - BALANCE (left/right balance), FADER
(front/rear balance) - SOUND DIST. (driver or passenger). - AUTO VOLUME.
The distribution, or spatialisation of sound, is an audio process which allows the sound quality to be improved according to the setting chosen, corresponding to the position of the listeners in the vehicle.
The AMBIANCE, TREBLE and BASS audio settings are different and independent for each sound source.
307
Audio and Telematics
Configuration
Display and language settings
Press the MENU button.
Select "Config.".
Select "Displaying" to activate or deactivate scrolling text.
Select "Language" to modify the display language.
Select "Version" for information on the software.
Select "System" when you want to install an update. Information can be obtained from a PEUGEOT dealer.
Select "Unit" to modify the units for temperature (Celsius, Fahrenheit).
308
Screen menu map(s)
MENU
Radio
1
Telephone
1
TA
2
RDS
2
TXT
2
Write freq.
2
Media
1
Normal
2
Random
2
Random all
2
Repeat
2
TA
2
Call
2
Directory
3
Calls list
3
Missed calls
4
Dialed calls
4
Answered calls
4
Phone status
2
Bluetooth
1
BT management
2
Search
2
Config.
1
Displaying
2
Scrolling text
3
Audio and Telematics
Language
2
Deutsch
3
English
3
Español
3
Français
3
Italiano
3
Nederlands
3
Português
3
Português-Brasil
3
3
Türkçe
3
Version
2
System
2
Unit
2
Celsius
3
Fahrenheit
3
10
309
Audio and Telematics
Frequently asked questions
The following tables contain answers to the most frequently asked questions.
QUESTION
ANSWER
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (volume, bass, treble, ambience, loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).
SOLUTION
Check that the audio settings (volume, bass, treble, ambience, loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to adjust audio settings (bass, treble, Front-Rear balance, Left-Right balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When changing the settings for treble and bass, the ambience setting is deselected. When changing the ambience setting, treble and bass are reset to zero.
Choosing an ambience imposes settings for treble and bass. Modifying one without the other is only possible with a personalised ambience.
Modify the treble and bass settings or the ambience setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
When changing the balance setting, distribution is deselected.
Choosing the "driver" distribution setting imposes a balance setting. Modify the balance setting or the distribution setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
310
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
ANSWER
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.
SOLUTION Activate the RDS function to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
10
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station.
is too frequent and always on the same route.
Traffic announcement TA is displayed. I do not receive any traffic information.
The radio station does not broadcast traffic information.
The stored stations are not An incorrect waveband is selected. found (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed...).
Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic information.
Press the SRC/TEL button to return to the waveband (FM1 or FM2) on which the stations are stored.
311
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player
any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot
the right way up.
play.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is
cannot be played if it is too damaged.
not recognised by the audio equipment.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are unsuitable.
The Bluetooth connection The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. is cut.
The message "USB device The USB memory stick is not recognised. error" is displayed on the screen.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
Use only USB memory sticks formatted to FAT 32 (28-bit file allocation table).
A telephone connects automatically, disconnecting another telephone.
312
Automatic connection overrides manual connection.
Modify the telephone settings to remove automatic connection.
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
An iPod is not recognised when connecting to the USB port.
ANSWER
The iPod is of a generation that is not compatible with the USB connection.
The hard disk or device is not recognised when connecting to the USB port.
Some hard disks and devices need a power supply greater than is provided by the audio system.
When streaming, the sound cuts momentarily.
Some telephones prioritise connection of the "hands-free" profile.
SOLUTION
Connect the device to the 230 V socket, the 12 V socket or an external power supply. Caution: ensure that the device does not transmit a voltage greater than 5 V (risk of destruction of the system). Delete the "hands-free" connection profile to improve streaming.
10
In "Random all" play, not In "Random all" play, the system can only take into account up to all of the tracks are played. 999 tracks.
With the engine off, the audio system switches off after a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time depends on the battery charge. The switch-off is normal: the audio system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.
The message "the audio system is overheated" appears on the display.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal protection mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of the CD.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to allow the system to cool.
313
Audio system
Audio and Telematics
First steps Steering mounted controls Radio Media Audio settings Screen menu map(s) Frequently asked questions
10
Contents 316 317 318 320 322 323 324
As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary. When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the system switches off after activation of economy mode.
315
Audio and Telematics
First steps
On/ Off, volume adjustment.
Selection of source: FM1, FM2, AM, CD, AUX.
Adjust audio settings: sound ambience, treble, bass, loudness, left/right balance, automatic volume.
Automatic search for a lower/higher radio frequency. Select the next CD track. Navigation in a list. Press and hold: fast forward or back.
Display the list of stations received, the CD/MP3 tracks or folders. Press and hold: update the list of stations received.
Manual search step by step for a higher radio frequency. Select the next MP3 track. Navigation in a list.
Manual search step by step for a lower radio frequency. Select the previous MP3 track. Navigation in a list.
Abandon the current operation. Go up one level (menu or folder).
316
Automatic search step by step for a higher radio frequency. Select the next CD track. Navigation in a list. Press and hold: fast forward. Open the main menu.
Select a preset radio station. Radio, press and hold: preset a radio station.
Eject CD.
Steering mounted controls
Radio: select the previous/ next preset station. Select the previous/ next item in a menu.
Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency. CD/ MP3: select the next track. CD: press and hold: fast forward.
Change audio source. Confirm a selection.
Audio and Telematics
Radio: automatic search for a lower frequency. CD/ MP3: select the previous track. CD: press and hold: fast back.
10
Volume up.
Volume down.
Mute on: cut the sound by simultaneously pressing the volume up and down buttons. Mute off: press one of the volume buttons.
317
Audio and Telematics
Radio
Presetting a station
Press the SRC/BAND button repeatedly to select the FM1, FM2 or AM waveband.
Press and hold a button to preset the station being listened to. The name of the station is displayed and an audible signal confirms that it has been preset.
The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure of the audio equipment.
Selecting a station
Press a button to listen to the corresponding preset station.
Managing the list
Press LIST to display the list of stations received, in alphabetical order.
Select the desired radio station by pressing one of the buttons.
Confirm with OK.
Briefly press one of the buttons to change to the next or previous letter.
Press and hold on LIST to construct or update the list of stations; the sound is interrupted temporarily.
RDS
RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage by an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.
Press MENU.
Select "Radio".
Confirm with OK.
Select "RDS".
Confirm with OK.
318
Select "On" or "Off" to switch RDS on or off.
Confirm with OK.
Receiving TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.
Press MENU.
Select "Radio".
Confirm with OK.
Select "Traffic TA".
Confirm with OK.
Audio and Telematics
Select "On" or "Off" to switch on or off the reception of traffic announcements.
Confirm with OK.
10
319
Audio and Telematics
Display RADIO TEXT
Radio Text is information transmitted by the radio station on the station or on the song being played.
Press MENU.
Select "Radio".
Confirm with OK.
Select "INFO TEXT".
Confirm with OK.
Select "On" or "Off" to switch radio text on or off. Confirm with OK.
Media
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
CD player
Insert a CD into the player, play starts automatically. Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player. The audio system searches for audio tracks, which can take from a few to several dozen seconds before play starts.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player...) to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable (not supplied).
Press the SRC/BAND button repeatedly and select "AUX".
First adjust the volume on your portable device (to a high level). The adjust the volume on your audio system. Control is from the portable device.
Press the SRC/BAND button repeatedly to select "CD".
Press one of these buttons to select a track in the list.
Press one of these buttons to select the previous or next folder according to the category chosen.
Press and hold one of these buttons for fast forward or back.
320
Audio and Telematics
Playing a compilation
Press LIST to display the folder structure for the compilation. Select a line in the list.
Confirm with "OK".
Jump a page.
Select a folder/ Playlist.
Start play of the chosen track.
Go up one level.
Go back to the first level to select the track classification: - By Folders: all folders containing audio
files recognised on the peripheral device, in alphabetical order, ignoring the folder structure. - By Playlist: depending on the playlists saved.
Play mode
Press MENU.
Select "Media".
Confirm with OK.
The play modes available are: - Normal: the tracks are played
in order, depending on the classification of the selected files. - Random: the tracks in an album or folder are played in a random order. - Random all: all of the tracks saved in the media ar played in random order. - Repeat: the tracks played are only those from the current album or folder.
Select the desired play mode.
Confirm with OK to save the changes.
10
321
Audio and Telematics
Information and advice
The audio system can only play files with ".mp3", ".wma" or ".wav" extensions.
Playlists accepted are types .m3u and .pls. The system can recognise up to 5 000 files in 500 folders on 8 levels.
It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying problems.
On a given disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files spread over 8 levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played. The folder structure is not observed during playback.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet. If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for a given disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.
322
Audio settings
Press ¯ to display the audio settings menu.
The settings available are: - AMBIANCE, - BASS, - TREBLE, - LOUDNESS, - BALANCE (L/R), - AUTO VOLUME.
Select the settings to adjust.
Confirm with OK.
Adjust the setting.
Confirm with OK.
The AMBIANCE, TREBLE and BASS settings are different and independent for each sound source.
Screen menu map(s)
MENU
Radio
1
Displaying
1
Traffic
2
RDS
2
TEXT INFO
2
Media
1
Play
2
Normal
3
Random
3
Random all
3
Repeat
3
TEXT INFO
2
SCROLLING
2
Unit
1
Celsius
2
Fahrenheit
2
Language
1
Audio and Telematics
10
323
Audio and Telematics
Frequently asked questions
The following tables contain answers to the most frequently asked questions.
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambiance, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambiance, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Fader, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience "None" and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When changing the settings for treble and bass, the ambiance setting is deselected. When changing the ambiance setting, treble and bass are reset to zero.
Choosing an ambiance imposes settings for treble and bass. Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the treble and bass settings or the ambiance setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
324
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed...).
ANSWER The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.
SOLUTION
Switch on the RDS function to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
10
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Switch off the RDS function if the phenomenon is
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station.
too frequent and always on the same route.
The traffic announcement (TA) is displayed. I do not receive any traffic information.
The radio station does not broadcast traffic information.
The stored stations are not An incorrect waveband is selected. found (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed...).
Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic information.
Press the SRC button to return to the waveband (AM, FM1, FM2) on which the stations are stored.
325
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player
any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot
the right way up.
play.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is
cannot be played if it is too damaged.
not recognised by the audio equipment.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. The audio settings (bass, treble, ambiance) are unsuitable.
In "Random all" play, not In "Random all" play, the system can only take into account up to all of the tracks are played. 999 tracks.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambiance.
With the engine off, the audio system switches off after a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time depends on the battery charge. The switch-off is normal: the audio system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.
The message "the audio system is overheated" appears on the display.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal protection mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of the CD.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to allow the system to cool.
326
Alphabetical index
A
B
Accessories...................................................162 Access to rear seats........................................36 Active City Brake............................................ 141 AdBlue®.................................................... 20, 174
Battery.....................................................208-211 Battery, charging............................................210 Battery, remote control..............................44, 45 Blind, panoramic roof.......................................70
Checks................................... 121, 168, 169, 173 Child lock........................................................ 114 Children (safety)................................95, 100-114 Child seats ............................................ 100, 113
.
Adjusting headlamps.......................................85 BlueHDi............................................ 20, 174, 214 Child seats, conventional...............................106
Adjusting head restraints.................................50 Bluetooth (telephone)............................ 282, 304 Child seats, ISOFIX....................................... 110
Adjusting seats...........................................49, 51 Adjusting the air distribution................60, 62, 63
Bonnet............................................................ 167 Boot..................................................................43
Closing the boot...............................................43 Closing the doors.............................................37
Adjusting the air flow............................60, 62, 63 Adjusting the date............................................33 Adjusting the seat belt height..........................93 Adjusting the temperature...................59, 61, 63 Adjusting the time............................................33 Advice on driving................................... 117, 160 Airbags.......................................................23, 96 Airbags, curtain..........................................98, 99 Airbags, front.............................................96, 99 Airbags, lateral...........................................98, 99 Air conditioning, digital....................................63 Air conditioning, manual..................................61 Air intake................................. 56, 60, 62, 65, 63 Air vents...........................................................56 Alarm................................................................ 41
Brake discs/pads........................................... 173 Brake lamps...........................................199, 200 Brake warning lamp.........................................18 Braking assistance system..............................90 Braking, automatic emergency...................... 141 Bulbs (changing)............................................195
C
Connected services.......................................266 Connection, Bluetooth.......................... 282, 304 Connection, MirrorLinkTM...............................270 Connection, Wi-Fi network............................268 Control, electric windows.................................46 Control,
emergency boot release................................43 Control, heated seats.......................................52 Controls, at steering...................... 228, 297, 319 Control stalk, lighting................................. 77, 80 Control stalk, wipers........................................87 Courtesy lamp..................................................68 Cruise control.........................................136, 139 Cup holder........................................................ 71
Anti-lock braking system (ABS).......................90
Anti-theft.................................................. 45, 118 Cable, audio............................ 74, 254, 300, 320
Armrest, front...................................................52 Assistance call...............................................223 Assistance, emergency braking......................90 Audio streaming
(Bluetooth).................................. 254, 256, 303 Audio system..........................................295, 315 Auxiliary.................................. 72, 254, 300, 320
Capacity, fuel tank.........................................154 CarPlay connection...............................275, 276 CD..........................................................254, 301 Central locking.................................................37 Changing a bulb.............................................195 Changing a fuse.............................................202 Changing a wheel..........................................188 Changing a wiper blade.................................164
D
Changing the remote control battery...............44 Checking the engine oil level......................... 171 Checking the levels...................................25, 89,
168, 172, 180 Checking tyre pressures
(using the kit)...............................................186
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio..................................................252
Date (setting)....................................................33 Daytime running lamps.................... 83, 195-197 Deactivating the passenger airbag.......... 97, 102
327
Alphabetical index
Deadlocking.....................................................39 Demisting/defrosting........................... 58, 64, 66 Dials and gauges............................................. 11 Diesel............................................................. 157 Dimensions.................................................... 218 Dipstick................................................... 170, 171 Direction
indicators................ 80, 84, 195, 196, 199, 200 Display screen,
instrument panel....................................12, 129 Driving abroad.................................................85 Driving economically..................................... 115 Dynamic stability control
(DSC).................................................19, 90, 91
E
Eco-driving .................................................... 115 Electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)........................................90 Emergency braking
assistance (EBA)...........................................90 Emergency call..............................................222 Emergency warning lamps......................90, 182 Emissions control system, SCR.............. 21, 174 Engine compartment.............................168, 169 Engine, Diesel.......................... 15, 157, 169, 214 Engine, petrol......................................... 157, 168 Environment............. 44, 115, 151, 172, 178, 208
F
Filling the fuel tank.........................154, 156, 157 Filter, air......................................................... 173 Filter, oil.......................................................... 173 Filter, particle.................................................155 Filter, passenger compartment................ 57, 173 Fitting a wheel................................................193 Fitting roof bars..............................................165 Fittings, boot....................................................73 Fittings, interior................................................ 71 Flap, fuel filler.........................................154, 156 Flashing indicators...................................84, 196 Foglamp, rear...................................81, 199, 200 Foglamps, front..................................81, 86, 198 Frequency (radio)...........................250, 298, 318 Fuel................................................................ 157 Fuel consumption........................................... 115 Fuel tank................................................154, 156 Fusebox, dashboard............................. 204, 206 Fusebox, engine compartment......................207 Fuses..............................................................202
G
Gauge, fuel.............................................. 11, 154 Gearbox, automatic...............................126, 208 Gearbox, electronic............................... 123, 131 Gearbox, manual................................... 122, 131 Gear lever, manual gearbox..........................122 Gear shift indicator........................................129 Glove box......................................................... 71 Guide-me-home...................................36, 79, 80
H
Hazard warning lamps.............................90, 182 Headlamps, automatic illumination.................79 Headlamps........................................77, 195-197 Head restraints, front.......................................50 Head restraints, rear..................................54, 55 Heating.................................................59, 61, 63 Hill start assist................................................130
I
Identification, vehicle.....................................220 Ignition............................................................ 120 Immobiliser, electronic............................. 45, 118 Indicator, coolant temperature.........................25 Indicator, engine oil level....................... 170, 171 Indicator lamps, operation...............................14 Indicators, direction................ 84, 196, 199, 200 Inflating tyres......................................... 115, 220 Inflating tyres and accessories
(using the kit)...............................................186 Input, auxiliary......................... 74, 254, 300, 320 Instruments and controls........................... 11, 48 Internet browser.............................................267 Isofix mountings.............................................109
328
Alphabetical index
J
N
Jack................................................................188 Jukebox..........................................................257 Jump starting.................................................209
Lighting, cornering...........................................86 Lighting dimmer...............................................34 Lighting, guide-me home.....................36, 79, 80 Lighting, interior.........................................68, 69
Navigation......................................................230 Number plate lamps.......................................201
.
Lighting, mood.................................................69
Loading.................................................. 115, 165
Load reduction mode.....................................161
Locating your vehicle.......................................36
Low fuel level...........................................22, 154
O
K
Key with remote control.....................35, 45, 118 Kit, hands-free...................................... 282, 304 Kit, temporary puncture repair.......................183
Opening the bonnet.......................................167 Opening the boot.............................................43 Opening the doors...........................................35 Opening the fuel filler flap..............................154 Opening the panoramic roof blind...................70
M
L
Labels, identification......................................220 Lamps, parking................................................80 Level, AdBlue® additive.................................. 174 Level, brake fluid............................................ 170 Level, Diesel additive.....................................155 Level, engine coolant.......................................25 Level, engine oil..................................... 170, 171 Levels and checks....................................25, 89,
168-173, 180 Level, screenwash fluid...................................89 Light-emitting diodes - LEDs.........................200
Maintenance, routine..................................... 115 Map reading lamps..........................................68 Markings, identification..................................220 Mat................................................................... 71 Menu......................................................230, 323 Menus (Touch screen).......................... 225, 229 Mirror, rear view...............................................76 Mirrors, door....................................................75 Misfuel prevention..........................................156 Mountings, Isofix............................................109 MP3 CD..................................................254, 301
P
Pads, brake............................................ 121, 173 Paint colour code...........................................220 Paint, matt...................................................... 181 Parcel shelf, rear.............................................. 74 Park Assist..................................................... 147 Parking brake................................................. 121 Petrol.............................................................. 157 Peugeot Connect Assistance....................223 Peugeot Connect Packs............................223 Peugeot Connect SOS..............................222 Plates, identification......................................220 Player, Apple®................................................256 Player, MP3 CD......................................254, 301
329
Alphabetical index
Player, USB....................................................254 Port, USB........................................ 72, 254, 300 Pre-heater, Diesel............................................15 Pressures, tyres.............................................220 Pre-tensioning seat belts.................................95 Priming the fuel system................................. 214 Protecting children............................95, 100-114 Puncture.........................................................183
R
Radio..............................................250, 298, 318 Radio, digital (Digital Audio
Broadcasting - DAB)....................................252 Range, AdBlue............................................... 176 RDS................................................ 251, 299, 318 Rear screen, demisting....................................67 Recharging the battery..................................210 Recirculation, air..................................60, 62, 65 Reduction of electrical load...........................161 Regeneration of the particle filter..................155 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation
detection system..........................................153 Reinitialising the remote control......................44 Reminder, key in ignition................................120 Reminder, lighting on.......................................82 Remote control...........................................35, 45 Removing a wheel.........................................191 Removing the mat............................................ 71 Replacing bulbs.............................................195 Replacing fuses.............................................202
Replacing the air filter.................................... 173 Replacing the oil filter.................................... 173 Replacing the passenger
compartment filter................................. 57, 173 Reservoir, screenwash....................................89 Resetting the service indicator........................28 Reversing camera..........................................146 Reversing lamps....................................199, 200 Risk areas (update)........................................ 241 Roof bars........................................................165 Roof, panoramic...............................................70 Running out of fuel (Diesel)........................... 214
S
Safety, children...........................................95, 100-114
Screen, instrument panel...........................30, 31 Screen menu map................................ 230, 244,
258, 266, 272, 276, 278, 309, 323 Screenwash.....................................................89 Screenwash, rear.............................................88 SCR (Selective Catalytic
Reduction)................................................... 174 Seat belts........................................... 93-95, 106 Seats, front...........................................36, 49, 51 Seats, heated...................................................52 Seats, rear..................................................53, 54 Serial number, vehicle...................................220 Service indicator..............................................26 Servicing........................................................ 115
Settings (Menus)............................................258 Sidelamps.............77, 80, 83, 195-197, 199, 200 Side repeater.................................................199 Snow chains...................................................158 Socket, 12 V accessory...................................72 Sockets, audio........................ 72, 254, 300, 320 Speed limiter..........................................134, 139 Starting the engine........................................ 118 Starting the vehicle................ 118, 119, 123, 126 Starting using another battery.......................209 Station, radio..................................250, 298, 318 Stay, bonnet...................................................167 Steering mounted controls,
audio............................................ 228, 297, 317 Stopping the vehicle...................................... 118 Stop & Start............................... 16, 66, 131, 147,
154, 167, 208, 211 Storage.......................................................52, 71 Stowing rings...................................................73 Switching off the engine................................120 Synchronising the remote
control............................................................44
T
Tables of fuses...............................................202 Tank, AdBlue® additive.................................. 174 Tank, fuel................................................154, 156 Telephone............................................. 278, 304 Temperature, coolant.......................................25
330
Third brake lamp............................................201 Three flashes (direction indicators).................84 Time (setting)...................................................33 TMC (Traffic info)...........................................242 Tools...............................................188, 202, 212 Touch screen.....................................29, 31, 153 Touch screen (Menus).......................... 225, 229 Towbar....................................................159, 160 Towing another vehicle.................................. 213 Traction control (ASR)...............................19, 90 Traffic information (TA)......................... 243, 299 Traffic information (TMC)...............................242 Trailer.....................................................159, 160 Trajectory control systems...............................90 Triangle, warning...........................................182 Trip computer.............................................30, 31 Tyres....................................................... 115, 218 Tyre under-inflation detection........................ 151
V
Ventilation.................................... 56-58, 61, 115 Voice recognition................................... 271, 275
W
Warning and indicator lamps...........................14 Warning lamp, braking system........................18 Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater........15 Warning lamp, SCR emissions control
system............................................................ 21 Wheel, spare..................................................188 Window controls..............................................46 Wiper blades (changing)................................164 Wiper, rear.......................................................88 Wipers........................................................16, 87 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive......................87
U
Under-inflation (detection)............................. 151 Unlocking.........................................................35 Unlocking the boot...........................................43 Updating risk areas........................................ 241 Updating the date.............................................33 Updating the time.............................................33 USB................................................. 72, 254, 309
Alphabetical index
.
331
This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole range.
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of this equipment described in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the country in which it is sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation. Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update this edition of the handbook.
This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer. In addition, there are labels present in your vehicle to warn you of the need for certain precautions to take for your safety; don't remove them, they will be useful again for a new owner.
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by application of the provisions of the European regulation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this regulation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.
For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified workshop that has the technical information, competence and equipment required, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.
We draw your attention to the following points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories not listed by PEUGEOT may cause faults and failures with the electrical system of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer for information on the range of recommended accessories.
- As a safety measure, access to the diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's electronic systems, is reserved strictly for PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops, equipped with the special tools required (risk of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic systems that could cause breakdowns or serious accidents). The manufacturer cannot be held responsible if this advice is not followed.
- Any modification or adaptation not intended or authorised by Automobiles PEUGEOT or carried out without meeting the technical requirements defined by the manufacturer would lead to the suspension of the legal and contractual warranties.
Printed in the EU Anglais 01-16
www.peugeot.com
Anglais
AN. 16208.0040
Instruments
Warning / indicator lamp State
Low fuel level
fixed with the needle in the red zone.
flashing with the needle in the red zone.
Engine oil pressure
fixed.
Cause
Action / Observations
There remains approximately 5 litres of fuel in the tank. At this point, you begin to use the fuel reserve.
There remains very little fuel in the tank.
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is made. Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres (45 litres for the BlueHDi Diesel engine). Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as this could damage the emission control and injection systems.
There is a fault with the engine lubrication system.
You must stop as soon it is safe to do so. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Battery charge* fixed. Under-inflation fixed.
The battery charging circuit has a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, ...).
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The pressure in one or more wheels is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible. This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold.
flashing then fixed,
The tyre pressure monitoring system Under-inflation detection is not assured.
accompanied by the has a fault or no sensor is detected Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
+
Service warning lamp. on one of the wheels.
qualified workshop.
* Depending on the country of sale. 22
Practical information
Fuel tank
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 50 litres (45 litres for the BlueHDi Diesel engine).
Low fuel level
Refuelling
When the low fuel level is reached this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel. There remains approximately 5 litres of fuel in the tank. When the warning lamp flashes, there is very little fuel left.
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. For more information on Running out of fuel (Diesel), refer to the corresponding section.
The key cannot be removed from the lock until the cap is refitted. Removing the filler cap may cause an inrush of air. This vacuum is perfectly normal and results from the sealing of the system.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the system in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the key.
1. Open the filler flap. 2. Remove the filler cap. 3. Hook the filler cap.
A self-adhesive label on the inner face of the filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use depending on your engine. Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to be registered by the fuel gauge.
To fill the tank safely: the engine must be switched off, open the fuel filler flap 1, insert the key in the cap 2, then turn it to
the left, remove the cap and hook it onto the clip
located on the inside of the flap 3, fill the tank, but do not continue after the
3rd cut-off of the pump; this could cause malfunctions.
154
Practical information
When you have filled the tank: put the cap back in place, turn the key to the right, then remove it
from the cap, close the flap.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for the engine of your vehicle, you must have the fuel tank drained and filled with the correct fuel before starting the engine.
Diesel
Particle filter
The start of saturation of the particle filter is indicated by the fixed illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by a warning message in the screen (if a display screen is fitted).
As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off. If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a low additive level.
Diesel additive
A low additive level is indicated by illumination of the service warning lamp, accompanied by an audible warning and a message in the screen (if a display screen is fitted).
Topping-up This additive must be topped-up by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
7
Fuel supply cut-off
Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an impact.
On a new vehicle, the first particle filter regeneration operations may be accompanied by a "burnt" smell, which is normal. Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the emission of water vapour at the exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.
155
Audio and Telematics
Emergency or assistance call
Type 1
PEUGEOT Connect SOS
In an emergency, press this button for more than 2 seconds. Flashing of the green indicator lamp and a voice message confirm that the call has been made to the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS"* centre.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the call. The green indicator lamp goes off.
The green indicator lamp remains on (without flashing) when communication is established. It goes off at the end of the call.
If you benefit from the PEUGEOT Connect Packs offer with the SOS and assistance pack included, there are additional services available to you in your personal space, via the Internet website for your country.
PEUGEOT Connect SOS immediately locates your vehicle, makes contact with you in your language** and - if necessary - organises sending of the appropriate emergency
* Depending on the terms and conditions for the service, available from dealers, and technological and technical limits.
services**. In countries where the service is not
operational, or if the locating service has been ** Depending on the geographic cover for
expressly declined, the call is directed straight
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT
to the emergency services (112) without
Connect Assistance" and the official national
location.
language selected by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered by PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available at dealers or on the website in your country.
.
1
Audio and Telematics
PEUGEOT Connect Assistance
Operation of the system
When the ignition is switched on, the green indicator lamp comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly.
Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request assistance if the vehicle breaks down. A voice message confirms that the call has been made**.
If the orange indicator lamp flashes then goes off: the system has a fault.
If the orange indicator lamp is on fixed: the back-up battery should be replaced. In both cases, the emergency and assistance calls service may not work. Contact a qualified repairer as soon as possible.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.
Geo-location
If you purchased your vehicle outside the Brand's dealer network, we suggest that you have a dealer check and, if desired, modify the configuration of these services. In a multi-lingual country, configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.
For technical reasons, particularly to improve the quality of PEUGEOT CONNECT services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.
The fault with the system does not prevent the vehicle being driven.
You can deactivate geo-location by simultaneously pressing the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons, followed by a press on "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" to confirm.
To reactivate geo-location, simultaneously press the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons again, followed by a press on "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" to confirm.
** Depending on the geographic cover for "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" and the official national language selected by the owner of the vehicle.
The list of countries covered by PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available at dealers or on the website in your country.
2
Audio and Telematics
Emergency or assistance call
Type 2
PEUGEOT Connect SOS
In an emergency, press this button for more than 2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice message confirm that the call has been made to the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" call centre*.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green LED goes off.
The green LED remains on (without flashing) when communication is established. It goes off at the end of the call.
If you benefit from the PEUGEOT Connect Packs offer with the SOS and assistance pack included, there are additional services available to you in your personal space, via the Internet website for your country.
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS" immediately locates your vehicle, starts communication with you in your language**, and where necessary sends the appropriate public emergency services**. In
* Subject to the general conditions for the service available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations.
countries where the service is not available, or
when the locating service has been expressly
** Depending on the geographical cover of
declined, the call is sent directly to the
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT
emergency services (112) without the vehicle
Connect Assistance" and the official national
location.
language selected by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available from dealers or on the website in your country.
.
3
Audio and Telematics
PEUGEOT Connect Assistance
Operation of the system
When the ignition is switched on, the green LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly.
For all countries except Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan.
The red indicator lamp flashes then goes off: there is a system fault. The red indicator lamp is on continuously: replace the back-up battery.
For Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan. The red indicator lamp is on continuously: there is a system fault.
The red indicator lamp flashes: replace the back-up battery.
In either case, the emergency and assistance calls may not function. Contact a qualified repairer as soon as possible.
A fault with the system does not prevent the vehicle being driven.
Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request assistance if the vehicle breaks down. A voice message confirms that the call has been made**.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.
Geo-location
You can deactivate geo-location by simultaneously pressing the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons, followed by a press on "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" to confirm. To reactivate geo-location, simultaneously press the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons again, followed by a press on "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" to confirm.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the Brand's dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country, configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.
For technical reasons and in particular to improve the quality of "PEUGEOT CONNECT services" services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.
** Depending on the geographical cover of "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" and the official national language selected by the owner of the vehicle.
The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available from dealers or on the website in your country.
4
7-inch touch screen
GPS satellite navigation - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth® telephone
Audio and Telematics
Contents
First steps
6
Steering mounted controls
8
Menus
9
Navigation
10
Navigation - Guidance
18
Traffic
22
Radio Media
24
Radio
30
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
32
Media
34
Settings
38
Connected services
46
MirrorLinkTM
46
CarPlay®
50
Telephone
52
Frequently asked questions
60
The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.
As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.
The display of an energy economy mode message signals that
electrical systems operating are going into standby.
Refer to the energy economy mode section.
.
5
Audio and Telematics
First steps
Use the buttons to the left of the touch screen for access to the menu carousels, then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Each menu is displayed in one or two pages (primary page and secondary page).
In very hot conditions, the system may go into stand-by (screen and sound completely off) for a minimum period of 5 minutes.
Primary page
Secondary page
6
Audio and Telematics
Short-cuts: using the touch buttons in the upper band of the touch screen, it is possible to go directly to the selection of audio source, the list of stations (or titles, depending on the source).
In very hot conditions, the volume may be limited to protect the system. The return to normal takes place when the temperature in the passenger compartment drops.
Press on Menu to display the menu carrousel.
Selection of audio source (depending on version): - FM /DAB* /AM stations*. - USB memory stick. - CD player (located in the glove box)*. - Smartphone via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®. - Telephone connected by Bluetooth* and
with Bluetooth* audio streaming. - Media player connected to the auxiliary
socket (jack, cable not supplied).
Press on SRC to display the audio sources carrousel.
Volume adjustment (each source is independent, including traffic announcements (TA) and navigation instructions).
With the engine running, press to mute the sound. With the ignition off, press to switch the system on.
The screen is of the "resistive" type, it is necessary to press firmly, particularly for "flick" gestures (scrolling through a list, moving the map...). A simple wipe will not be enough. Pressing with more than one finger is not recognised. The screen can be used when wearing gloves. This technology allows use at all temperatures.
To clean the screen, use a soft non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) without any additional product. Do not use pointed objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
.
* Depending on equipment. 7
Audio and Telematics
Steering mounted controls
Press: mute on / off.
Increase volume.
Decrease volume.
Change audio source: radio, media. 8
Radio, rotate: automatic search for the previous / next station. Radio, press: preset stations. Media, rotate: previous / next track. Press: confirm a selection.
Telephone: start or answer a call. Call in progress: telephone menu (end call, secret mode, hands-free mode). Telephone, press and hold: reject an incoming call, end a call in progress; other than call in progress, telephone menu. Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Radio, press and hold: update the list of stations received.
Menus
Navigation
(Depending on equipment)
Radio Media
Audio and Telematics
Settings
Enter navigation settings and choose a destination.
Connected services
(Depending on equipment)
Select an audio source, a radio station, display photographs.
Adjust the settings for sound (balance, ambience, ...) and the display (language, units, date, time, ...).
Telephone
Driving
Operate certain applications on your smartphone via MirrorLinkTM or CarPlay®.
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®. Access to the CarPlay® function after connection of your smartphone by USB cable.
Access to the trip computer. Activate, deactivate or enter settings for certain vehicle functions.
.
9
Audio and Telematics
Navigation
Level 1
Level 2 Navigation
Level 3 Route settings
10
Level 1
Navigation Settings
Navigation
Navigation
Level 2 Enter destination
Route settings
Save current location Stop navigation Voice synthesis Diversion
Level 3
Fastest Shortest Time/distance Ecological Tolls Ferries Traffic Strict-Close Show route on map Confirm
Audio and Telematics
Comments Display recent destinations
Choose the navigation criteria. The map displays the route chosen according to these criteria.
Display the map and start navigation.
Save the options.
Save the current address.
Delete the navigation information.
Choose the volume for voice and announcement of street names. Detour from your initial route by a determined distance.
Display in text mode
Zoom in.
Zoom out.
Display in full screen mode.
Use the arrows to move the map. Switch to 2D map.
.
11
Audio and Telematics Level 1 Navigation
12
Level 2 Enter destination
Level 3 Address
For managing contacts and their addresses, refer to the "Telephone" section.
Contacts
To use the telephone functions, refer to the "Telephone" section.
Level 1
Level 2 Address
Navigation Secondary page Enter destination
Contacts
On the map
Itinerary Stop Navigate to
Level 3 Current loc. Point of interest Town center Save Add waypoint Navigate to Addresses View Navigate to Search for contact Call
Audio and Telematics Comments Address settings
Save the current address. Add a waypoint to the route. Press to calculate the route.
Select a contact then calculate the route.
Display the map and zoom to view the roads. Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the itinerary. Delete navigation information. Press to calculate the route.
. 13
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Navigation
Search for a point of interest Point of interest displayed on the map
14
Level 1 Navigation
Secondary page Search for POI
Navigation Secondary page
Show POIs
Level 2 All POIs Motor Dining/hotels Personal Search Select all Delete Import POIs Confirm
Level 3
Audio and Telematics Comments List of categories available. After choosing the category, select the points of interest.
Save the settings.
Choose the display settings for POIs.
Save the options.
. 15
Audio and Telematics Level 1 Navigation
16
Level 2 Traffic messages
Map settings Settings
Level 3 Diversion
Map settings
Settings
Settings
Moving between the two menus.
Level 1 Navigation
Secondary page Traffic messages
Navigation Secondary page
Map settings
Navigation Secondary page
Settings
Level 2 On the route Around vehicle Near destination Detour Finish
Orientation
Maps
Aspect
Confirm Route settings Voice Alarm! Traffic options Confirm
Level 3
Audio and Telematics Comments
Detour over a distance Recalculate route
Flat view north heading Flat view vehicle heading Perspective view
"Day" map colour "Night" map colour Automatic day/night
Settings for the choice of messages and the filter radius. Save your selections.
Choose the display and orientation of the map.
Save the settings.
Enter settings and choose the volume for the voice and announcement of street names.
Save your selections.
.
17
Audio and Telematics
Navigation - Guidance
Choosing a new destination
Towards a new destination
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Address".
Select the "Country:" from the list offered, then in the same way the "City:" or its post code, the "Road:", the "N°:". Confirm each time.
Select "Save" to save the address entered as a contact entry. The system allows up to 200 entries.
Select "Navigate to".
Choose the navigation criteria: "Fastest" or "Shortest" or "Time/ distance" or "Ecological".
Choose the restriction criteria: "Tolls", "Ferries", "Traffic", "Strict", "Close". Select "Confirm".
Or
Press on "Show route on map" to start navigation.
18
To delete navigation information, press on "Settings".
Press on "Stop navigation".
To resume navigation press on "Settings". Press on "Resume guidance".
Audio and Telematics
Towards a recent destination
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select an address from the list offered.
Towards a contact
To be able to use navigation "towards a contact in the directory", it is first necessary to enter the address for your contact.
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press "Show route on map" to start navigation.
Select "Contacts".
Select a destination from the contacts in the list offered. Select "Navigate to". Select the criteria then "Confirm" to start navigation.
. 19
Audio and Telematics
Towards GPS coordinates
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Towards a point on the map
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Towards points of interest (POI)
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different categories.
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Address".
Select "On the map".
Select "Search for POI".
Enter the "Longitude:" then the "Latitude:".
Select "Navigate to".
Zooming in on the map shows points with information.
A long press on a point opens its content.
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press "Show route on map" to start navigation.
Select "All POIs",
Or "Motor",
Or "Dining/hotels".
20
An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you. You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month. The detailed procedure is available on: http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Audio and Telematics
. 21
Audio and Telematics
Risk areas / Danger zone alert settings
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Alarm!" (Alert).
It is then possible to activate Risk areas alerts then: - "Audible warning" - "Alert only when navigating" - "Alert only for overspeed" - "Display speed limits" - Timing: the choice of timing allows the
time before giving a Risk areas alert to be defined.
Select "Confirm".
22
This series of alerts and displays is only available if Risk areas have first been downloaded and installed on the system.
Traffic
Traffic information
Display of messages
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Traffic messages".
Choose filter settings for: "On the route",
"Around",
"Near destination", filters to finetune the list of messages. Press again to remove the filter.
Audio and Telematics
Select the message from the list offered.
Setting filters
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Select the magnifying glass to have voice information.
Press on the secondary page. Select "Settings".
Receiving TA messages
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages on GPS-Navigation contain traffic information transmitted in real time.
Select "Traffic options".
Select: - "Be advised of new messages", - "Speak messages". Then enter the filter radius.
Select "Confirm".
We recommend a filter radius of: - 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas, - 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
Select "Voice".
Activate / Deactivate "Traffic (TA)".
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function
needs good reception of a radio station
transmitting this type of message.
When a traffic report is transmitted,
the current audio source is interrupted
automatically to play the TA message.
Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.
.
23
Audio and Telematics
Radio Media
Level 1
Level 2 List of FM stations
Save 24
Level 1 Radio Media
List
Radio Media Source
Radio Media Save
Level 2
List of FM stations
FM Radio DAB Radio AM Radio USB CD MirrorLinkTM CarPlay® iPod Bluetooth AUX
Audio and Telematics Comments Press on a radio station to select it.
Select change of source.
Press an empty location to Save it.
. 25
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Media
Level 2 List of FM stations
Photos
Level 3
26
Level 1 Radio Media Secondary page
Radio list
Radio Media Secondary page
Photos
Level 2 Save Update list Frequency Confirm Home screen Rotate Select all
Slideshow
Full screen
Level 3
Previous photo. Pause / Play. Next photo.
Audio and Telematics
Comments Press a radio station to select it.
Update the list of stations received.
Enter the desired radio frequency.
Save the settings.
Display the selected photo in the home page.
Rotate the photo 90°. Select all the photos in the list. Press again to deselect. Display the photos in sequence, full-screen. The system supports the following image formats: .gif, .jpg, .bmp, .png.
Display the selected photo full-screen.
. 27
Audio and Telematics Level 1 Media
28
Level 2
Level 3
Settings
Settings Settings
Level 1 Radio Media Secondary page
Media list
Radio Media Secondary page
Settings
Level 2
Media Settings
Radio Settings
Announcements Settings Confirm
Level 3
Audio and Telematics Comments Presentation of the last media used.
Shuffle (all tracks)
Shuffle (current album) Choose the play settings.
Repeat
Aux. amplification
RDS options
DAB/FM station tracking
Display Radio Text
Activate or deactivate the settings.
Digital radio slideshow display
Traffic announcements (TA)
News - Weather Sport - Programm info
Activate or deactivate the settings.
Flash - Unforeseen
events
Save the settings.
.
29
Audio and Telematics
Radio
Selecting a station
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select "List" in the primary page.
Or Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Radio list" in the secondary page.
Select a radio station from the list offered.
Select "Update list" to refresh the list.
To select a preset radio station. Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
30
Select "Save".
Select a preset radio station in the list. If necessary, select change of source.
Select "FM Radio".
Or "AM Radio".
Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnel, car park, below ground...) may prevent reception, even in RDS station tracking mode. This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio system.
Changing a radio frequency
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
By automatic frequency search
Press 3 or 4 to move the cursor for an automatic search down or up for a radio frequency. THEN
Select change source.
Select "FM Radio".
Or "AM Radio".
Audio and Telematics
Presetting a station
Activating / Deactivating RDS
OR
Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the
Press on Radio Media to display the
corresponding section).
primary page.
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Press on "Save" (preset).
Press on the secondary page.
Press on the secondary page. Press on Frequency.
Select a number in the list to preset the previously chosen radio station. A long press on a number saves (presets) the station.
Select "Settings". Select "Radio".
THEN
Enter the frequency in full (e.g.: 92.10 MHz) using the keypad then "Confirm".
Changing radio station Pressing the name of the current radio station brings up a list. To change radio station press the name of the desired station.
Or
A press on this button presets all of the stations one after the other.
Recalling preset stations
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select "Save" (preset).
Activate/deactivate "RDS options".
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.
. 31
Audio and Telematics
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
Display of the name of the current station.
Short-cut: access to the choice of audio source and the list of stations (or titles, depending on the source).
Select the radio station.
Any thumbnail broadcast by the station.
Select the audio source. Display the "DAB" band.
Secondary page.
Previous "Multiplex". Previous radio station. Display the name and number of the "multiplex" service being used.
32
Display of "Radiotext" for the current station.
Next "Multiplex". Next radio station.
Display of options: if active but not available, the display will be greyed out, if active and available, the display will be blank.
Preset stations, buttons 1 to 15. Short press: select the preset radio station. Long press: preset a radio station.
If the "DAB" radio station being listened to is not available on "FM", the "DAB FM" option is greyed out.
Journaline® is a text-based information service designed for digital radio systems. It provides text-based information structured around topics and sub-topics. This service is available from the "LIST OF DAB STATIONS" page.
Audio and Telematics
Digital radio
Digital radio provides higher quality reception and also the graphical display of current information on the radio station being listened to. Select "List" in the primary page. The range of multiplexes available is displayed in alphabetical order.
DAB / FM auto tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory. When the digital radio signal is poor, "DAB/FM station tracking" allows you to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue station (if there is one).
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select change of source.
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "DAB Radio".
Select "Settings".
Select "List" in the primary page.
or Select "Radio list" in the secondary page.
Select the radio station from the list offered.
Select "Radio".
Select "Digital/FM auto tracking" then "Confirm".
If "DAB/FM station tracking" is activated, there is a difference of a few seconds when the system switches to "FM" analogue radio with sometimes a variation in volume. When the digital signal is restored, the system automatically changes back to "DAB".
If the "DAB" station being listened to is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM" option greyed out), or "DAB/FM station tracking" is not activated, the sound will cut out while the digital signal is too weak.
. 33
Audio and Telematics
Media
USB port
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Selecting the source
Press on Radio Media to display the primary page.
Select change of source.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port or connect the USB device to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
The system builds playlists (in temporary memory), an operation which can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or on connection of a USB memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they are not modified, the subsequent loading time will be shorter.
This source is only available if the "Auxiliary socket" option has been activated in the "Media" settings.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player...) to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable (not supplied).
First adjust the volume of your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your audio system. Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.
Choose the source.
The steering mounted SRC (source) button can be used to go to the next media source, available if the source is active.
Press on OK to confirm the selection.
CD player
Insert the CD in the player.
34
Audio and Telematics
Information and advice
The audio system will only play audio files with".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and .mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. No other type of file (.mp4, etc.) can be played. ".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9 type. The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and 48 KHz.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard. If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT 32 (file allocation table).
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
It is recommended that the USB cable for the portable device is used.
It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g. " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.
The system supports USB mass storage devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players via USB ports. The adaptor cable is not supplied. Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls. Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not supplied).
. 35
Audio and Telematics
Bluetooth® audio streaming
Streaming allows audio files on your telephone to be played through the vehicle's speakers.
Connecting Apple® players
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" section, then "Bluetooth". Choose the "Audio" or "All" profile.
If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the telephone. Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be a media source. It is recommended that you activate "Repeat" on the Bluetooth® peripheral.
Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts). The default classification used is by artist. To modify the classification used, return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification (playlists for example) and confirm to go down through the menu to the desired track.
The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple® player.
. 37
Audio and Telematics
Settings
Level 1
Level 2 Audio settings
Audio settings Audio settings
38
Level 1
Settings Audio settings
Settings Turn off screen
Ambience Balance Sound effects Ringtones Voice Confirm
Level 2
Audio and Telematics
Comments Choose the sound ambience.
Sound distribution using the Arkamys® system. Set the volume or activate the link to vehicle speed. Set the telephone ringtone and volume. Set the volume and voice for speaking street names. Save your settings.
Function that turns off the display. Pressing the screen reactivates it.
. 39
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Configuration
40
Level 2 Units
Adjust date and time
Display screen
Factory settings
Level 1
Settings Secondary page System Settings
Settings Secondary page
Time/Date
Settings Secondary page Screen settings
Units
Level 2
Delete data
Factory settings
Confirm
Confirm
Activate automatic text scrolling Activate animations Confirm
Audio and Telematics Comments Set the units used to display distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Select the desired data in the list then press Delete. Return to factory settings. Save the settings.
Set the date and time then confirm.
Activate or deactivate the setting then confirm.
. 41
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Configuration
42
Level 2 Choice of language
Calculator
Calendar
Level 1 Settings
Secondary page Languages
Settings Secondary page
Calculator
Settings Secondary page
Calendar
Confirm
Level 2
Audio and Telematics Comments Select the language then confirm. Select the calculator. Select the calendar.
. 43
Audio and Telematics
Audio settings
Press on Settings to display the primary page. Select "Audio settings".
Select "Ambience"
Or "Balance"
Or "Sound effects"
Or "Ringtones"
Or "Voice".
44
The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys® system) of sound is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted to the number of passengers in the vehicle. Available only with the 6-speaker configuration.
The audio settings (Ambience, Bass:, Treble: and Loudness) are different and independent for each sound source. The settings for Distribution and Balance are common to all sources.
- "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical ambiences)
- "Bass:" - "Treble:" - "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate) - "Distribution" ("Driver", "All
passengers", "Front only") - "Audible response from touch
screen" - "Volume linked to speed"
(Activate/Deactivate)
On-board audio: Arkamys© Sound Staging optimises sound distribution in the passenger compartment.
Modifying system settings
Press on Settings to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "System Settings".
Select "Units" to change the units of distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Select "Delete data" to delete the list of recent destinations, personal points of interest, contacts in the list.
Choose the item then select "Delete".
Select "Factory settings" to return to the original settings.
Press on Settings to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Screen settings".
Activate or deactivate "Activate automatic text scrolling" and "Activate animations".
Audio and Telematics
Press on Settings to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page
Select "Time/Date" to change the time zone, synchronisation with GPS, the time and its format, then the date.
The system does not manage changes between summer time and winter time automatically (according to country).
Select "Languages" to change language.
Select "Calculator" to display a calculator.
Select "Calendar" to display a calendar.
.
45
Audio and Telematics
Connected services MirrorLinkTM
Optional depending on the smartphone and operating system.
46
MirrorLinkTM smartphone connection
As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. All operations must be done with the vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a smartphone allows applications on a smartphone that are adapted to the MirrorLinkTM technology to be displayed in the vehicle's screen. The principles and standards are constantly evolving. For the communication process between the smartphone and the system to work correctly, the smartphone must be unlocked; update the operating system of your smartphone as well as the date and time in the smartphone and the system. For the list of eligible smartphones, connect to the brand's internet website in your country.
Audio and Telematics
As a safety measure, applications can only be viewed with the vehicle stationary; display is interrupted once the vehicle is moving.
Please note: - if your smartphone is supported, to
make it "MirrorLinkTM" compatible, some phone manufacturers nevertheless invite you to first download a dedicated application.
When connecting a smartphone to the system, it is recommended that Bluetooth® be started on the smartphone
Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable.
Start the application on the smartphone (optional, depending on the smartphone and operating system).
During the procedure, several screen pages relating to certain functions are displayed. Accept to start and end the connection.
Once connection is established, an page is displayed with the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLinkTM technology. If only one application has been downloaded to the smartphone, it starts automatically.
Access to the different audio sources remains accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons
From the system, press on
Voice recognition
"Connected services" to display the primary page.
Press the end of the lighting control stalk to start voice recognition of your smartphone via
Press on "MirrorLinkTM" to
the system.
start the application in the system.
Voice recognition requires a compatible smartphone connected to the vehicle by Bluetooth®.
.
47
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
48
Level 1
Level 2
Connected services
MirrorLinkTM
Level 3
Audio and Telematics
Comments
Access or return to the applications already downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLinkTM technology.
Access to a menu list depending on the application chosen. "Back": abandon the current operation, go up one level. "Home": access or return to the "Car mode" page.
Access to the "Connected services" primary page.
. 49
Audio and Telematics
CarPlay®
50
Audio and Telematics
CarPlay® smartphone connection
As a safety measure and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, using a smartphone when driving is prohibited. All operations must be done with the vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a
smartphone that are adapted to the
Or
CarPlay® technology to be displayed on
the vehicle's screen.
As the principles and standards are
constantly evolving, it is recommended
that you update the operating system of
your smartphone.
For the list of eligible smartphones,
connect to the brand's internet website
in your country.
Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable.
On connecting the USB cable, the "Telephone" function changes to "CarPlay" in the menu carousel. Press on "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® interface.
When the telephone menu is displayed, connection of the USB cable causes the display to automatically change to CarPlay mode. When another menu is displayed, on connection of a USB cable a message is displayed in the upper bar, indicating that CarPlay mode has been activated. Press Open to display CarPlay mode.
Connect the USB cable. The smartphone is charged while connected by the USB cable.
From the system, press on "Connected services" to display the primary page.
Press on "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® interface.
Voice recognition
Press the end of the lighting control stalk to start voice recognition of your smartphone via the system.
As a safety measure, applications
During the procedure, one or more
can only be viewed with the vehicle
screen pages relating to certain
stationary; display is interrupted once the vehicle is moving.
functions are displayed on connection.
.
51
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
Level 1
52
Level 2 Call log
Contacts
Level 3
Level 1
Telephone Call log
Level 2 All calls Incoming calls Outgoing calls Contacts
Magnifying glass
Call Addresses
Telephone Contacts
View
Navigate to Search for contact Call
Level 3
Audio and Telematics Comments
View Create
Create Modify Delete Delete all By name Confirm
After making choices, start the call. After making choices, start the call.
. 53
Audio and Telematics Level 1
Telephone connection
Level 2 Bluetooth (devices)
Devices detected
Telephone Options
54
Level 3
Level 1
Telephone connection Secondary page Bluetooth connection
Telephone connection Secondary page Search for
devices
Telephone connection Secondary page Telephone Options
Level 2 Search Connect/Disconnect Update Delete Confirm
Devices detected
Put on hold Update Ringtones Memory info. Confirm
Level 3
Telephone Audio streaming Internet
Audio and Telematics
Comments Start the search for another peripheral device to connect. Start or stop the Bluetooth® connection to the selected peripheral device. Import the contacts from the selected telephone to store them in the audio system. Delete the selected telephone.
Save the settings.
Start the search for peripheral devices.
Cut the microphone temporarily so that the contact cannot hear your conversation with a passenger.
Import the contacts from the selected telephone to save then in the audio system.
Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.
Contact records used and free, percentage of
storage space used by internal contacts and
Bluetooth® contacts.
Save the settings.
.
55
Audio and Telematics
Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth® mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio system must be carried out with the vehicle stationary.
Procedure from the system
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth® function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone configuration).
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Procedure (short) from the telephone
In the Bluetooth® menu of your device, select the system name in the list of devices detected.
Enter a code of at least 4 figures in the device and confirm.
Enter this same code in the system, select "OK" and confirm.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection".
Select "Search for devices". The list of telephones detected is displayed.
If the telephone is not detected, it is recommended that you switch the Bluetooth® function on your telephone off and then on again.
Select the name of the desired peripheral from the list and "Confirm".
Enter a code of at least 4 figures for the connection then "Confirm".
Enter this same code in the telephone then accept the connection.
The system offers to connect the telephone: - in "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only), - in "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless
playing of audio files from the telephone), - in "Internet" (internet browsing, only if your
telephone is compatible with the "DUN" Dial-Up Networking Bluetooth® standard). Select one or more profiles and confirm.
56
Audio and Telematics
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth® telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.
Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to accept or not the transfer of your contacts.
If not, select "Update".
The ability of the system to connect with only one profile depends on the telephone. The three profiles may all connect by default.
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, additional help, ...).
The recognised telephone appears in the list.
On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone connected is present again, it is reconnected automatically and within around 30 seconds after switching on the ignition the pairing is done without any action on your part, with (Bluetooth® activated). To modify the automatic connection mode, select the telephone in the list then select the desired profile.
Depending on your telephone, you may be asked to accept automatic connection every time the ignition is switched on.
Connecting a Bluetooth® peripheral device
Automatic reconnection
On switching on the ignition, the telephone connected when the ignition was last switched off is automatically reconnected, if this connection mode had been activated during the pairing procedure. The connection is confirmed by the display of a message and the name of the telephone.
Manual connection
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list of paired peripherals.
Select the peripheral to connect. Press on "Search for devices".
The connection is confirmed by the display of a message and the name of the telephone.
.
57
Audio and Telematics
Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral device as well as the deletion of a pairing.
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list of paired peripheral devices.
Select the peripheral in the list. Select "Search for devices"
Or "Connect / Disconnect" to start or end the Bluetooth connection with the selected device.
Or "Delete" to delete the pairing.
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering mounted TEL button to accept an incoming call. Make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button to reject the call.
Or Select "End call".
Making a call
Using the telephone is not recommended while driving. Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering mounted controls.
Calling a new number
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Enter the phone number using the digital keypad. Press "Call" to start the call.
Calling a contact
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button.
58
Managing contacts / entries
Select "Contacts".
Select the desired contact from the list offered. Select "Call".
Calling a recently used number
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Or Select "Call log".
Press on Telephone to display the primary page. Select "Contacts".
Select "View".
Select "Create" to add a new contact, observing the "international format".
"Modify" to edit the selected contact.
Or Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; park the vehicle first as a safety measure.
Or
"Delete" to delete the selected contact.
"Delete all" to delete all information for the selected contact.
Audio and Telematics Select "By name" to view the list of contacts.
. 59
Audio and Telematics
Frequently asked questions
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
Navigation
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The route calculation is not The route settings may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
successful.
toll roads on a toll motorway).
menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected.
Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The Risk areas audible warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active.
The system does not
The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages.
suggest a detour around an
incident on the route.
Activate audible warnings in the "Navigation" menu.
Select the "Information" function in the list of route settings.
I receive a Risk areas alert which is not on my route.
Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for Risk areas located on nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the Risk areas. Select "On the route" to no longer receive alerts other than navigation instructions or to reduce the time for the announcement.
60
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
Certain traffic jams along the route are not indicated in real time.
ANSWER
SOLUTION
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive Wait until the traffic information is being received
the traffic information.
correctly (display of the traffic information icons
on the map).
The filters are too restrictive.
Modify the settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traffic information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available.
The altitude is not displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely so
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions.
. 61
Audio and Telematics
Radio
QUESTION
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
ANSWER The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.
SOLUTION Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. through a car wash or into an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of stations received.
The name of the radio station changes.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example). The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
Press and hold the "List" button at the steering mounted controls to update the list of stations received or press on the system update function: "Update list".
62
Audio and Telematics
Media
QUESTION
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
ANSWER
Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).
SOLUTION
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the file structure on the memory stick.
When I connect my iPhone as a telephone and to the USB port at the same time, I am unable to play the music files.
When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the track being played with Apple® players.
Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the USB function takes priority over streaming).
The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player (udf...). played if it is too badly damaged.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio system.
Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section. The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
Some recorded CDs will not be played by the
audio system because they are not of adequate
quality.
There is a long waiting
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain
This phenomenon is normal.
period following the insertion amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few
of a CD or connection of a seconds to a few minutes. USB memory stick.
.
63
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
The CD player sound is poor.
ANSWER The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
SOLUTION
Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.
Some characters in the media information are not displayed correctly while playing.
The audio system does not display some types of characters.
Use standard characters to name tracks and folders.
Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device. does not start.
The names of tracks and the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
64
Audio and Telematics
Settings
QUESTION In changing the setting of treble and bass the equalizer setting is deselected.
ANSWER
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings. Modifying one without the other is not possible.
SOLUTION
Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
In changing the equalizer setting, treble and bass return to zero.
When changing the balance settings, the distribution setting is deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or distribution settings to
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing an distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.
When the "All passengers" mode is selected, the distribution is not as I would like.
The choice of an "All passengers" distribution setting can be programmed.
Modify the distribution setting using the slider on the touch screen.
. 65
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources.
ANSWER
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Loudness, Ambience, Treble, Bass, Volume can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source.
SOLUTION
Check that the audio settings (Loudness, Ambience, Treble, Bass, Volume) are adapted to the sources listened to. Adjust Balance, Treble and Bass to the middle position, select the "None" musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
charge.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
66
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
QUESTION I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone.
ANSWER The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone may not be visible.
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.
SOLUTION Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".
You can check the compatibility of your telephone at www.peugeot.co.uk (services).
The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible.
Some contacts are duplicated in the list.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.
Increase the volume of the audio system, to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone Reduce the ambient noise level (close the
communication.
windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow
down...).
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display telephone contacts".
Contacts are not shown in Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings
alphabetical order.
chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.
Modify the display setting in the telephone directory.
The system does not receive The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to
SMS text messages.
the system.
.
67
Audio and Telematics 68
Compatibility of fuels
Fuel used for petrol engines
The petrol engines are compatible with bio-fuels that conform to current and future European standards and can be obtained from filling stations.
Petrol that meets the EN228 standard, mixed with a bio-fuel meeting the EN15376 standard.
The only petrol additives authorised for use are those that meet the B715001 standard.
Fuel used for Diesel engines
The Diesel engines are compatible with biofuels that conform to current and future European standards and can be obtained from filling stations.
Diesel fuel that meets standard EN590 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 (possibly containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
Diesel fuel that meets standard EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 (possibly containing up to 10% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets standard EN15940 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 (possibly containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
The use of B20 or B30 fuel meeting standard EN16709 is possible in your Diesel engine. However, this use, even occasional, requires strict application of the special servicing conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions".
The only Diesel additives authorised for use are those that meet the B715000 standard.
Diesel fuel at low temperature
In temperatures below 0°C (+32°F), the formation of paraffins in the summer diesel fuels may result in abnormal operation of the fuel supply system. To avoid this, the use of winter diesel fuels is recommended, keeping the tank topped up to more than 50% of its capacity. If in spite of this you experience difficulties starting the engine in temperatures below -15°C (+5°F), simply leave the vehicle in a garage or a heated workshop for a while.
For more information, contact a dealer of the brand or a qualified workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio) fuel (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system).
Travelling abroad
Certain fuels could damage the engine of your vehicle. In certain countries, the use of a particular fuel may be required (specific octane rating, specific sales name...) to ensure correct operation of the engine. For any additional information, contact your dealer.
*16CAR.A040* 16CAR.A040
iTextSharp™ 5.5.2 ©2000-2014 iText Group NV (AGPL-version)